Home

User`s Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and

1. nn pe KELSEC O POWER RNR NANANA NANI NA NANA NA WOU NANI NINANA ake Ko ice j e gt lt PULL j MITSUBISHI 115 4 53 k 55 2 2 17 R Unit mm inch App 9 App 9 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 3 Main base unit 1 Main Base Unit Q33B ee screws M4 x14 rN a a q z E x 4 J A i T PIRN Jey ie ie Wey hy o m o g B5 ive BUR ull tf Wo Mil olg 4 FFI E POWER Pu moos Toni lo Sle LE D e oi N any a oa 7 5 0 30 44 4 1 74 169 0 3 6 65 0 01 189 7 44 0 61 Unit mm inch 2 Main Base Unit Q35B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 L Ae r ee i x TE ey P yy Al ale 4 IERIE al 2 2 a L O oo g F igh POWER craie Toot in a Q i 5 L SATR 7 5 X 0 30 44 1 e 1 74 15 5 i 224 5 0 3 8 85 0 01 245 9 65 Unit mm inch 3 Main Base Unit Q38B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 Rly Py P E Wey uy a ER yy T S MT T cut Tot
2. D9205 D9206 Stores the number of retry times due to transmission Number of Stored as cumulative error D921 D121 3210 s retries value Count stops at maximum of FFFF RESET to return the count to 0 D9211 D9212 D9213 D9214 11 85 11 85 11 ACPU Special Special Register after Conversion Conversion D9216 SD1216 D9217 SD1217 D9218 SD1218 D9219 SD1219 D9220 SD1220 D9221 SD1221 D9222 SD1222 D9224 SD1224 D9225 SD1225 D9226 SD1226 D9227 SD1227 D9228 SD1228 D9229 SD1229 D9230 SD1230 D9231 SD1231 11 86 Special Register for Modification TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue Local station error detect Local station parameters non conforming remote I O station I O allocation error Local station and remote I O station initial communications underway Local station and remote I O station error Meaning Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers Stores conditions Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions Stores conditions for
3. L N gt E ie gal IE ty alle Hey UPy dpe 8 EN I I ie o RP 4 qe Wl oe 1 L POWER Too roni rogi o 3 la om eo 167 0 3 6 57 0 01 189 7 44 Z5 0 30 44 4 1 74 0 61 App 12 MELSEC Q Unit mm inch Unit mm inch Unit mm inch Unit mm inch App 12 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 4 Extension Base Unit Q65B 4 mounting screws M4 4 p 98 3 86 80 0 3 3 15 0 01 or 0 28 222 5 0 3 8 77 0 01 245 9 65 0 61 Unit mm inch 5 Extension Base Unit Q68B 4 mounting screws M4 x 14 5 A M M A A A A A Al A dle k Ph VEL WET TER ERP TBP TPR a S lS i We ER Ee Ed coy SiS WE 700 j roy Toge 103 104 1 05 1 06 on o g g2 g S 4 oo co 7 5 i 0 30 44 4 2 174 15 5 306 0 3 12 06 0 01 0 61 328 12 92 R Unit mm inch 6 Extension Base Unit Q612B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 Z E H H d Bes SERE a te ER a u ME A a a A a a gt n M T o e Hh thy a a a WW ME AT T 9
4. 11 Fuse blown module Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU D1300 The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are D1301 input as a bit pattern in units of 16 points D1302 If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D1303 Bit pattern in units numbers are stored 7 l D1304 of 16 points e Also detects blown fuse condition at remote station output LLL j j j modules ae D1305 indicating the 1514131211109 8 765 43 2 Cs D1306 Fuse blown modules whose A 1 0 1 aalies D1307 module fuses have blown SD1300 voo veo D1308 0 No blown fuse gp1301 wto olol 0 olo olo ANA nnn Inan Ivana 1 Blown fuse ANAN Wee AAA AANA n present D1331 0 0 e 0 o o 0 Jute Bo 30 ae Indicates a blown fuse Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation Bit pattern in units The module number in units of 16 points whose external power of 16 points supply has been disconnected is input as a bit pattern indicating the If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set Ext i modules whose numbers are used xternal ARE external power 15 14 13 12 11 10
5. 6 Terminal screw M3 5 x 7 screw Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block Medi ting screw roie Used to fix the module to the base unit M3 x 12 screw user prepared 8 Module fixing screw hole Tightening torque 36 to 48Necm Used to load the module into the base unit Used to connect a 100VAC power supply Used to connect a 200VAC power supply Used to connect a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply 13 Used to connect a 24VAC power supply 14 Used to connect a 100VAC 200VAC power supply POINTS 1 The Q61P A1 is dedicated for inputting a voltage of 100 VAC Do not input a voltage of 200 VAC into it or trouble may occur on the Q61P A1 Power Supply power voltage module type 100VAC 200VAC P l l Q61P A1 Operates normally eA AeA Power supply module does not cause trouble 1P A2 lly so CPU module cannot be Operates morally operated 2 Q64P automatically switches the input range 100 200VAC Therefore it is not compatible with the intermediate voltage 133 to 169VAC The CPU module may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is applied 3 Ensure that the earth terminals LG and FG are grounded 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q MEMO 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE This section describes the specifications of the extension cables for the base units main base unit and extension base unit used in the P
6. POINTS To set the stages No setting connector set a number from 1 to 7 according to the number of extension stages Do not set the same stage number at two or more positions or do not fail to set a number A miss input or miss output may occur 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 5 I O Number Allocation The I O numbers are automatically allocated in the system loading status 0 12 3 4 a 5 X Y X Y X Y IXI XIY y 52 0 20 40 60 80 Oo 5 2 U SBIOE T e 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ist 1 A XIY X Y XIV X Y XIX XIY XIY X Y extension By AO CO EO 100 120 140 160 180 stage 33 peed A 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ond i a XIY X Y XIV X Y IX Y X Y EXSY X Y extension 2 1A0 1C0 1E0 200 220 240 260 280 O os stage 28 21 22 23 24 25 ord SE KYY XYY extension Z o 2A0 2C0 2E0f300 320 stage i 33 Qe In this system 32 point modules are loaded on slots 0 to 25 For the I O number setting method using GX Developer refer to the Operating Manual of GX Developer For details of I O number allocation refer to the following manual e Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 6 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units Q501B Since the Q5DB is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module on the main ba
7. Install the module properly YES NO Is the ERR LED YES turned off Are all the extension cables of the base module connected properly Install the extension cable properly YES NO Is the ERR LED YES turned off P i Replace the applicable module roper operanon Error detection P Replace the CPU module Oper operation Error detection Replace the applicable Proper operation base unit Error detection Hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion 11 16 11 16 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 17 Flowchart for wnen CONTROL BUS ERR occurs The following shows the flowchart to be followed when CONTROL BUS ERR occurs at PLC power on or during operation This flow chart can be confirmed only when a specific slot base unit can be detected by the error code CONTROL BUS ERR occurs Check the slot base unit where error occurred with the GX Developer Is the module of the applicable slot installed properly Is the extension cable of the applicable base unit installed properly NO Install the module and cable properly YES NO Is the ERR LED YES turned off Are all the extension cables of the base unit connected properly Install the extension cable properl
8. i HIG Rise monitor operation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0 e Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I O stations e Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch numbers or base unit slot numbers when fuse blow occurred 1 O module for AOJ2 Extension base unit Setti B it S mg Stored data ee Stored data switch slot No Number of 1 Fuse blown module with blown fuse For remote I O station value of module I O number 10H 1 is stored 11 77 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Conversion Conversion Modification D9002 SD1002 D9004 SD1004 VO module 1 O module 4 5 D verification error verification error module number MINI link master Error detection module errors Number of times for AC DOWN Corresponding CPU Details If O modules of which data are different from data entered are detected when the power is turned on the first I O number of the lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in hexadecimal Storing method is the same as that of SD1000 To monitor the number by peripheral devices perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0 I O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote
9. MITSUBISHI Q25PHCPU MODE RUN QJ 77BR11 Bcf pass BN aO O ER POWER 98mm 3 86 inch lt PULL MITSUBISHI moo ee gt c6 09 Sear o e9 ro lo la GEES GES OSes ple GES CSC GES SEG EneGEE CoS GG ciMEc 5 Slot Main Base Unit 245mm 9 65inch depth 98mm 3 86inch gt 8 Slot Main Base Unit 328mm 12 92inch 12 Slot Main Base Unit 439mm 17 30inch 12 Connection of up to seven extension base units a The Process CPU can connect to seven extension base units eight base units including the main and accept up to 64 modules b The overall distance of the extension cables is up to 13 2m to ensure high degree of extension base unit arrangement 13 Memory extension by memory card The Process CPU is provided with a memory card installation connector to which a memory card of 32 Mbyte max can be connected 32 Mbyte is available when a ATA card is used When a memory card of large capacity is installed a large capacity of file can be controlled comments to all data devices can be set up and the programs in the past can be stored in the memory as they are in the form of the corrected histories If a memory card is not installed a program can be stored onto the standard ROM built in
10. Subprogram 2 ROM Subprogram 3 ROM Main program E PROM Subprogram 1 E PROM Subprogram 2 E PROM Subprogram 3 E PROM D9016 SD1016 Program number D9017 SD1017 SD520 Scan time Minim rn sca time 10 ms units Corresponding CPU When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Since storage into SD1011 is made when SM1011 changes from off to on the contents of SD1011 cannot be renewed unless SM1011 is cleared by user program The I O control mode set is returned in any of the following numbers 0 Both input and output in direct mode 1 Input in refresh mode output in direct mode 3 Both input and output in refresh mode The operation status of CPU as shown below are stored in SD203 B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4 B3 to BO e _ foe Remote RUN STOP by computer Po Aw CPU key switch Pe aw Remains the same in remote RUN STOP mode Remote RUN STOP by parameter setting Status in program Pe Rw STOP o Except below 1 PAUSE 1 x 1 When the CPU module is in RUN mode and instruction execution SM1040 is off the CPU module remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode e Indicates which sequence program is run presently One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520 the value is n
11. Diagnostics PLC Menu 5 Click the Error Jump button in the PLC diagnostics dialog box to display the error code and error message 6 Select the Help PLC error Menu and confirm the content of the applicable error code For details of the GX Developer operating method refer to the applicable the GX Developer Operating Manual 11 18 11 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 2 Error code list The following information deals with error codes and the meanings causes and corrective measures of error messages in the Corresponding CPU column indicates that the error is applied to Process CPU module Rem indicates compatibility with the remote I O module Common Individual Operating d T FSB Error Messages Information Information LED LeDStatus LED Status Ruses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 ERROR CPU Ea Flicker On oot o o oo 1005 MAIN CPU DOWN Eiker eA or oos 1009 00 _ or When an END instruction i en an Instruction Is pe END NOT EXECUTE off Flicker Stop Sxecutad 11 om E mo i s mo i ro 1104 __ RAM ERROR Flicker At power ON At reset 1105 w a CIRCUIT ERR Flicker At power ON At reset 1202 Stop When an END instruction is 1300 FUSE BREAK OFF Unit module No Off ON Flicker On Continue executed x2 E in a indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 2 The CPU module operation status when an error
12. Multiple CPU automatic refresh setting is any of the followings ina multiple CPU system 1 When a bit device is specified as a refresh device a number oiner than a multiple of 16 is specified for the refresh starting evice 3 The device specified is other than the one that may be specified 3 The number of send points is an odd number e The unit that is used as the standard and the contents that are set 3004 3010 3012 system parameter during multiple CPU system construction e During multiple CPU system construction the online module change settings are enabled even though the CPU installed doesn t support online module change parameters Parameter contents have been destroyed The automatic refresh range of the multiple CPU system exceeded hange the file register file for the one refresh enabled in the whole the file register capacity range heck whether the parameter file version is gt gt QPA and check the file contents to be sure they are parameters are different in the online module change parameter multiple CPU 1 Check and correct the parameters boot setting 2 Delete unnecessary files in the program memory 3 Choose Clear program memory for boot in the parameter so that boot is started after the program memory is cleared Read the error individual information at the GX Developer check to be sure that the parameter drive name and file name correspond to the numerical values there parameter num
13. Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws Not doing so could result in electric shock Undertightening of terminal screws can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening of screws can cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER The online operations conducted for the CPU module being operated connecting the peripheral device especially when changing data or operation status shall be conducted after the manual has been carefully read and a sufficient check of safety has been conducted Operation mistakes could cause damage or problems with of the module Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so could cause trouble erroneous operation injury or fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone more than 25cm 9 85 inch away from the PLC Not doing so can cause a malfunction Switch all phases of the external power supply off before mounting or removing the module If you do not switch off the external power supply it will cause failure or malfunction of the module Note that online module change can be made when the QnPHCPU is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed online and each module has a predetermined changing procedure For details
14. e Mount anew module to the same slot and connect the external wiring Refer to Section 9 3 3 for module mounting f After mounting the module click the Execution button The following table indicates the status of communication with the module changed online when the following screen is being displayed Executed Installation confirmation eE nsi Data is held Staus Change module installation completion l O mixed module i Not executed Status Guidance fresh i Data is held The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions Output refresh Not executed and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted 3 Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Intelligent function module Input refresh Output refresh FROM TO instruction Instruction using intelligent function module device instruction dedicated for Intelligent No processing function module automatic refresh of intelligent No processing function module Buffer memory batch monitor If the initial settings of the intelligent function module have been made using GX Configurator the preset data are written to the intelligent function module Module control restart Cancel No processing g Click the Execution button to start control 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULE MELSEC Q h The Online module change completed screen appears The following table indicat
15. RUN e Reset with the RESET L CLR switch e Restart the PLC power To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the parameters carry out the following steps e Reset with the RESET L CLR switch e Restart the PLC power If the RUN STOP switch is set from RUN gt STOP gt RUN after changing the parameters the parameters related to the intelligent function module such as the network parameters will not be reflected LED Detection of self diagnostic error which will not stop operation except battery error When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter 4 ERR LED Normal Detection of error whose occurrence stops operation When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally BOOT LED also flickers Error detected by CHK instruction or annunciator ON 5 USER LED Normal Execution of latch clear Occurrence of battery error due to reduction in battery voltages of CPU module 6 BAT LED or memory card Normal Start of boot operation 7 Non execution of boot operation When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally ERR LED also flickers Module loading lever Used to load the module to the base unit BOOT LED 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module M loadi emoy cardigading Connector used to load the memory card to the CPU module connector Connector
16. Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification When one of FO to 2047 is turned on by SET F 1 is added to the contents of SD63 When RST F or LEDR instruction is executed 1 is subtracted from Annunciator P the contents of SD63 When CPU module has Annunciator k D9124 D1124 SD63 detection INDICATOR RESET switch pressing that switch i detection quantity f quantity performs the same processing Quantity which has been turned on by SET F is stored into SD63 in BIN code The value of SD63 is maximum 8 When any of FO to 2047 is turned ON by SET F F D1125 sp64 numbers turned ON sequentially are registered into D9125 D9132 F numbers turned OFF by RST F are deleted from D9125 D9132 and move to data registers D1126 SD65 subsequent to the ones that stored deleted F numbers Execution of LEDR instruction shifts up SD64 SD71 contents one place When CPU module has INDICATOR RESET switch pressing that switch performs the same processing When there are eight annunciator numbers detected the ninth number is not stored into SD64 SD71 if SD1128 SD67 detected sree fannunciator a A Corresponding CPU 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 wale 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 D1131 SD70 65 65 eo f
17. D9125 D9126 D9127 D9128 detection 5 detection number WOOO A a A E E O O E Doo SDi Snes numar 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 1 213 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 D9130 D9131 D9132 11 83 11 83 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 10 Special register list dedicated for QnA ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification ZNRD LRDP for ACPU processing results i 7 p 7 ZNWR LWTP for ACPU processing results Local station link type 7 D SD1204 Link status 11 84 Corresponding Details CPU Meaning Stores the execution result of the ZNRD word device read instruction e ZNRD instruction setting fault Faulty setting of the ZNRD instruction constant source and or destination One of the stations is not communicating The specified station is a remote I O station 0 Normal end 2 ZNRD instruction setting fault 3 Error at relevant station 4 Relevant station ZNRD execution disabled e Corresponding station error e ZNRD cannot be executed in the corresponding station Stores the execution result of the ZNWR word device G Nommal ond write instruction 2 ZNWR instruction setting fault 3 Error at relevant station e LWTP instruction setting fault Faulty setting of the ZNWR instruction constant source and or destination 4 Relevant station Correspondi
18. Index register Z 16 points Z0 to 15 i 4096 points PO to 4095 set parameter values to select usable range Pointer P eae i of in file pointer shared pointers 256 points l0 to 255 A The specified intervals of the system interrupt pointers 128 to 131 can en fee Interrupt pointer i points is fixed be set with parameters 0 5 to 1000ms 0 5 ms unit Default 128 100ms 129 40ms 130 20ms_ 131 10ms 16 points FXO to F Function register FO Device having a direct access to link device MELSECNET 10 H use only Specified form JOO XOO JOO YOO JOO Woo JOO BOO JOO SwWOo JOO sBooO i Device having a direct access to the buffer memory of the intelligent Intelligent function module device z function module Specified form UOO COO LO to 8191 default Latch range can be set for B F V T ST C D and W Set parameter values The number of device Number of device points Link direct device Latch power failure compensation range RUN and PAUSE contacts can be set from among X0 to 1FFF to specify Remote RUN PAUSE contact y respectively Year month day hour minute second day of the week leap year automatic distinction Clock function Accuracy 3 18 to 5 25s TYP 2 12s d at 0 C Accuracy 3 93 to 5 25s TYP 1 90s d at 25 C Accuracy 14 69 to 3 53s TYP 3 67s d at 55 C Allowable momentary power failure period 5VDC internal current consumption 98mm 3 86inch H Ext
19. indicate whether to read from the link module For refresh from CPU to link B W etc whether to write to the link module e Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module e Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed QU61QBT11 Goes OFF when normal operation is restored ON if SFC program is correctly registered and OFF if not registered Goes OFF if SFC dedicated instruction is not correct e Initial value is set at the same value as SM320 Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present e SFC program will not execute if this goes OFF prior to SFC program processing Starts the SFC program when this relay goes from OFF to ON Stops the SFC program when this relay goes from ON to OFF e Initial value is set at ON or OFF depending on parameters e When this relay is OFF all execution statuses at stop of SFC program are cleared and execution starts fro
20. 1 RUN STOP switch STOP 2 RESET L CLR switch Move the switch to L CLR several times until the USER LED flickers USER LED Flicker Ready for latch clear 3 RESET L CLR switch Move the switch to L CLR once more USER LED OFF Latch clear complete POINTS 1 The ineffective range for latch clear can be set for each device by the device setting parameter 2 In addition to the way of using the RESET L CLR switch for latch clear remote latch clear may be performed from GX Developer For details of the remote latch clear operation using GX Developer refer to the Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 4 5 Executing Automatic Write to Standard ROM 1 Order of execution for automatic write to standard ROM Automatic write to the standard ROM is carried out with the following procedures a Operation with GX Developer setting automatic write to standard ROM 1 Check the Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM item in the PLC parameter boot file setting Set the parameter and program to be booted at the Boot file setting section Set the Transfer from to the Standard ROM PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS Device Progam Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment Check Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM r Boot option T Clear program memory System area assured steps Ksteps 0 15K step IV Auto Download all Data fr
21. 11 64 TROUBLESHOOTING Special Register List Continued Explanation When F goes ON due to or SET F the F numbers which go progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are registered F numbers turned OFF by are deleted from SD64 to SD79 and are shifted to the data register following the data register where the deleted F numbers had been stored Execution of the instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD79 up by one This can also be done by using the INDICATOR RESET switch on the front of the Q3A Q4ACPU After 16 annunciators have been detected detection of the 17th will not be stored from SD64 through SD79 SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110F151F210LEDR A _ A A _ A _ A ae _ A A A A A A A 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 Number detected Number of annunciators detected 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 a e 50 50 99 50 50 99 15 70 65 38 50 99 15 70 65 38 50 99 15 70 65 38 99 15 70 65 38 a 0 Number detected o o jo jo o lo o o oj o ojo o Error codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as BCD code e F numbers which go ON at step transition watchdog timer set value and watchdog timer over errors B15 Corresponds to SM90 Corresponds to SM91 B8 B7 BO Correspon
22. 2 Z olg o a a o 2 0 a a a a cap s 2 D S i8i3 3 of af ale al af 2 al al al g fo 2 5 c Ce Epo a a Cc Cc Cc Ze ro lox o jo 3 3 3 gt x o P1915 o 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 oy o Q a a a Co Co Co Co Co a Co a V 2 x o als 2 g 8 ol g lt olg jas Ss 2 Z 2 Q a 2 Z Z 2 6 D O Cc Oo Oo EA Oo Q oO O oO Q Q 56 D x a gt a w aa ajl fe D ke ko fe fe Ss S ka a ZIG I o o ae x o o x x O D ajo Q n fo ae fo 3 2 ol at D O o D O 3 S D 2 D oO a 2 a 2 Ke 5 App 5 App 5 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Error ead gt code Error Error description Countermeasure hexadecimal item 40A0H 40A1H 40A2u 40A3H 40A4H 40A5H 40A6H 40B0x 40B1H 40B2u 40B3H 41104 4111H 41D0x 41D1H 41D5H 41DFH 41E0H AtE1H 41E4H 41E8H A1E9H 41EBu 41ECH 41ED 41F2H A1FBx 41FCH 41FDH 41FEn A1FFH 4200H 42024 4210H 4211H App 6 SFC device specification error SFC file related error CPU mode error File related errors Online module change related error A block No outside the range was specified Check the setting contents and make a correction n l pecified g A umber ol bizocks that ex eeds th range Check the number of settings and make a correction was specified A step No that is outside the range was specified Check the setting contents and make a correction oe Check the number
23. 2301 2 Memory card format status is incorrect 1 Eotmat memory card ik ain b dah the CPU module has b 2 Reformat memory card 2302 pee that cannot be used with the module has been Check memory card Read the error individual information at the GX Developer check to 2400 The file designated at the PLC file settings in the parameters cannot be sure that the parameter drive name and file name correspond to be found the numerical values there parameter number and correct Create a file set in parameters and write it to the CPU module In a multiple CPU system the control CPU of the intelligent function module incompatible with the multiple CPU system is set to other than station 1 2300 N N a 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 26 11 26 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LEDStatus Operating FER SD oe Error Messages Information i Information LED Status oR Statuses of Diagnostic Timing j U 2401 FILE SET ERROR File name Parameter number Flicker Stop At power ON At reset Stop 2411 FILE OPE ERROR File name Program error location Off On Flicker ON Continue When instruction is executed 2 2412 2413 2500 CAN T EXE PRG File name Off Flicker Stop At power ON At reset 2502 2503 2504 3000 3 At power ON Reset PARAMETER
24. 6 6 External dimensions diagram App 9 to App 12 Installation and removal Of the module cc ceseeeeeeeteeees 9 14 to 9 15 Installation dimensions ccccceseeeeees 9 12 Installation GireCtion cccceeseeeesseeeeees 9 13 Installation position eee eeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 9 12 Names Of parts 0 00 eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 6 3 Specifications arisini piua aan 6 1 Battery Installations iiaea 7 6 Replacement procedure CPU module c ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 10 6 Replacement procedure SRAM Card ac ciaantigaidaiaaes 10 7 Replacement standard eee 10 5 Boot operation ccccceceeeseeeeeees 4 7 11 13 C Circuit Pail Sate noian na 9 5 System design csecceceeceeseeeeeeeeteeaes 9 3 9 4 Clock functions ainda Malcesine 4 3 Constant SCAN ceceeseeseceteseeeeeseaeeseeesaeees 4 1 Control method ccccccesecesecesseeeseeeseeees 4 1 CPU Installation and removal ccccceseeeeee 9 14 P rOrmanGe iinan ones Peat 4 1 D DIN rail installation adapter 0 0 cee eeeeeeeeeeeees 9 11 Applicable s or aeiiae 9 11 Intervals of installation screws 9 11 E Extension Base UMi cca ts altel a 6 1 Index 1 Cables aran a a Suasbebede Shc vastus 6 2 SLAG E E E E 2 3 6 5 External dimensions GPU innn ee 4 3 Base UNit eccccecceceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 6 1 Power supply module 5 2 G GX De
25. All match CHK instruction SM710_ priority ranking flag SM715 El flag Comment read completion flag OFF 16 characters output ON Outputs until NUL OFF Conditions priority ON Pattern priority OFF Comment read not completed ON Comment read completed OFF File not accessed ON File being accessed OFF Error detection performed ON Error detection not performed PKEY instruction OFF Instruction not execution in executed progress flag ON Instruction execution OFF Keyboard input reception enabled ON Keyboard input reception disabled OFF Instruction not executed ON Instruction execution BIN DBIN instruction error disabling flag Keyboard input reception flag for PKEY instruction MSG instruction reception flag Selection of link refresh OFF Performs link refresh processing during JON No link refresh COM instruction performed execution Enable disable local device at CALL Enable disable local device in interrupt program OFF Local device disabled ON Local device enabled OFF Local device disabled ON Local device enabled 11 49 Explanation Carry flag used in application instruction Outputs up to NUL 00h ASCII code when SM701 is OFF e The sort instruction is used to designate whether data should be sorted in ascending order or in descending order Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for the BKCMP instruction e Remains as origi
26. L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 Local station SD1250 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L4olL39 L38 L37 L36 L35 Corresponding CPU operation S E SD1251 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 tores conditions 7 7 Lee status The bit corresponding to the station number which is in STOP or PAUSE mode becomes 1 Example When local stations 7 and 15 are in STOP mode bits 6 and 14 of SD1248 become 1 and when SD1248 is monitored its value is 16448 40401 Stores the local station number other than the host which is Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 fin error to 16 Device Bit eae number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bo Stores conditions SD1252 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 SD1253 for up to numbers SD1253 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 SD1254 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 es Stores conditions D1255 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 L49 SD1254 The bit corresponding to the station number which is in error becomes 1 Example When local station 12 is in error bit 11 of SD1252 SD1255 becomes 1 and when SD1252 is monitored its value is 2048 8001
27. LED is turned off 11 5 MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the POWER LED of the power supply module turns off at PLC power on or during operation POWER LED is turned off Is there a power supply Supply power Can POWER LED be turned on Is the power supply voltage within the voltage range given in the specifications The supply voltage should be within the rated range Can POWER LED be turned on Is the power supply module fixed Properly fix the power supply module Can POWER LED be turned on 1 Check the electric current capacity and reduce the amount of overcurrent 2 Turn OFF the input power and wait several minutes before turning it ON again s overcurrent protection and overvoltage protection working Can POWER LED be turned on Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion 11 5 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 5 Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned off The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the RUN LED of the CPU module turns off during PLC operation RUN LED is turned off Proceed to Section 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the Power LED is turned off Is the POWER
28. M9101 M9102 11 54 Meaning Other than when P set being requested P set being requested Divided processing not underway During divided processing Batch processing Divided processing Read time not shortened Read time shortened Empty spaces in communication request registration area No empty spaces in communication request registration area Error check executed No error check No error Error Replacement No replacement SFC programs not used SFC programs used SFC programs stop SFC programs start Initial Start Continue Continuous transition not effective Continuous transition effective MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Details e Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing and turned off at completion of divided processing Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing e Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8UPU A8PUJ In this case the scan time is extended by 10 The A8UPU A8PUJ cannot be used in the QCPU QnACPU special relays e Indication of communication enable disable to remote terminal modules connected to
29. Not used CPU fault history QFD SFC trace QTS Local device QDL Not used Drive 3 4 use conditions Not used Not used Not used Not used S Initial and card removal S Initial and card removal S Initial and card removal S Status change S Initial S Initial S Initial S Status change Corresponding MELSEC Q Corresponding CPU 11 73 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Bi 3 po TT Fil ist S Stat SD640 ee PAIRS Drive number Stores drive number being used by file register Statys New drive change SD641 Stores file register file name with extension selected at parameters or by use of QDRSET instruction as ASCII code SD642 B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD641 Second character First character SD643 File register File register SD642 Fourth character Third character S Status il name fleaanie SD643 Sixth character Fifth character change New SD644 SD644 Eighth character Seventh character 9 SD645 First character of extension 2Ex SD645 SD646 Third character of extensi Second character of 2 ira character of extension extension SD646 File register File register Stores the data capacity of the currently selected file register in 1 k S Status N capacity capacity word units change ew Fil ist Fil ist S Stat n IIRS wil St
30. data link in forward loop values stored loopback loopback into SD1205 SD1206 do not return to 0 To return them to 0 therefore sequence program must be used or reset operation performed Corresponding CPU Stores the number of times the loop line has been SD1211 Number of times Stored as cumulative switched to reverse loop or loopback loop selected value Count stops at maximum of FFFFu RESET to return the count to 0 Local station Stores conditions for Stores the local station numbers which are in STOP or D1212 z up to numbers 1 to PAUSE mode operation status 1 6 Device a number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b6 b5 b4 b1 Stores conditions sp1212 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 7 L6 L5 L2 Local station SD1213 up to numbers A D1213 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L23 L22 L21 L18 operation status D1214 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 42 L471 L40 L39 L38 L37 L34 32 D1215 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L55 L54 L53 L50 Local station Stores conditions for When a local station is switched to STOP or PAUSE SD1214 number i i i i operation status up to numbers 33 to mode the bit corresponding to the station number in 48 the register becomes 1 oa Example When station 7 switches to STOP mode Local station SLOrES CONCMONS 10r bit 6 in SD1212 becomes 1 and when D9215 SD1215 up to numbers 49 to 7 a operation status 64 SD1212 is monitored its value is 64 40u
31. disassemble heat place in fire short circuit or solder the battery Mishandling of a battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires Turn the power off when cleaning the module or tightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Conducting these operations when the power is on could result in electric shock Loose terminal screws may cause short circuits or malfunctions Failure to mount the module properly will result in short circuit malfunction or in the module falling In order to ensure safe operation read the manual carefully to acquaint yourself with procedures for program change forced outputs RUN STOP and PAUSE operations etc while operation is in progress Operation mistakes could cause damage to the equipment and other problems Never try to disassemble of modify module It may cause product failure malfunction fire or cause injury When using any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone keep them away from the controller at least 25 cm 9 85 inch or it may cause a malfunction Turn the power off when installing or removing the modules Trying to install or remove the module while the power is on could damage the module or result in erroneous operation In order that you can use the PLC in normal and optimal condition at all times this section describes those items that must be maintained or inspected daily or at regular inter
32. error ON Error diagnosis SM1009 SM62 Annunciator OFF No F number detected Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is executed detection ON F number detected Switched off when SD1124 data is zeroed Turned on when operation error occurs during execution SM1011 SM56 Operation eror grkg No error of application instruction Remains on if normal status is flag ON Error restored SM1012 SM700 Carry flag Aue cae see Carry flag used in application instruction Clears the data memory including the latch range other SM1016 than special relays and special registers in remote run SM1017 mode from computer etc when SM1016 is on Clears the unlatched data memory other than special relays and registers in remote run mode from computer etc when SM1017 is on SM1020 cae timing clock This relay repeats ON OFF at designated scan intervals U IE Tock Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the SM1021 ee timing clog CPU module is reset o The ON OFF scan intervals are set by the DUTY SM1022 i timing clock ock n1 Scan interval of ON M9024 SM1024 pui ae timing cloc n2 Scan interval of OFF 7 e Writes clock data from SD1025 to SD1028 to the clock M9025 SM1025 oe set e a Cos fasani used element after the END instruction is executed during the q Den TECUeSt scan in which SM1025 has changed from off to on OFF No error M9026 SM1026 Clock data error ON Error e Switched on by clock data SD102
33. etc etc CPU module Lid oes e CHENEY Geer sere between CPU module and PC V O module QX10 QY10 etc _ Intelligent function module Q64AD QJ71LP21 25 etc x1 The CPU module is loaded on the Q3OB main base unit a Selection of power supply module for use of Q52B or Q55B extension base unit Using the Q52B or Q55B supplies 5VDC power from the power supply module of the main base unit through the extension cable Therefore note the following when using the Q52B or Q55B 1 The power supply module to be loaded on the main base unit should be selected to cover also the 5VDC used on the Q52B or Q55B For example either of the following power supply modules must be mounted on the main base unit when the current consumption on the main base unit is 3A and that on the Q52B or Q55B is 1A 5VDC Rated output current 6A Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q63P 8 5A Q64P 2 Since 5VDC is supplied to the Q52B or Q55B through the extension cable a voltage drop occurs at the extension cable You must select the power supply module and extension cable length to ensure that the IN connector voltage of the Q52B or Q55B is 4 75V or more For details of a voltage drop refer to Section 6 6 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units 5 4 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q b Ideas for reducing voltage drops The following methods are effective to reduce voltage drops at the extension cables 1
34. executed ON Retains the ON OFF status of the coil being used by using operation output of the step being executed at block stop OFF All coil outputs are turned off Operation output by the SET instruction is retained regardless of the ON OFF status of M9196 Switches I O numbers in the fuse blow module storage registers SD1100 to SD1107 and I O module verify error storage registers SD1116 to SD1123 according to the combination of ON OFF of the SM1197 and SM1198 e Recovers the setting data stored in the CPU at restart when sampling trace status latch is executed SM1199 should be ON to execute again Unnecessary when writing the data again from peripheral devices 11 55 11 TROUBLESHOOTING ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Relay Conversion Modification p M o SM1202 reception for master station ZNWR instruction LWTP instruction SM1203 for ACPU completion for master station ZNRD instruction LRDP instruction for ACPU reception for master station ZNRD instruction LRDP instruction for ACPU completion for master station ZNWR instruction LWTP instruction for ACPU ZNRD instruction LWTP instruction SM1204 SM1205 for ACPU SM1206 reception for local station ZNWR instruction Sets master station B and W SM1208 transmission range for lower link master stations only Link parameter jo fw a M9209 SM1209 for lower link ma
35. have been newly added for Process CPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU module type name Rem Can be applied to Process CPU and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to all types of CPU Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules Corresponding ACPU m OL Corresponding CPU For details on the following items see these manuals e Networks For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e SFC QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC SD1200 to SD1255 are used for QnACPU These relays are vacant with Process CPU 11 58 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 1 Diagnostic Information Corresponding i Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU CPU DL I e Eee fee a e errors error code e Contents identical to latest fault history information change Year last two digits and month that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code B15 to B8 B7 to BO Example October 95 Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 H9510 i The day and hour that SDO was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit Clock time for eer ume for code diagnosis error BI5 to B8 B7 to BO Example New occurrence Day 1 t031 Hour 0to 23 A on 25th The minute and second that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code BI5 to B8 B7 to B
36. or erroneous operation Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation The precautions on the connection of the power cables are described below 1 Power supply wiring a Separate the PLC s power supply line from the lines for I O devices and power devices as shown below When there is much noise connect an insulation transformer Insulation Main power PLC power transformer supply supply r ee AT 200VAC Or tO Oo Q S PLC l L_T1_ I O power supply MO OS gt O O gt O devices Main circuit device LON O O gt Main circuit device 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 2 MELSEC Q b Do not connect the 24VDC outputs of two or more power supply modules in parallel to supply power to one I O module Parallel connection will damage the power supply modules 2 D gt 3 fe E Q O gt module ia Power supply I O module 24VDC External powe
37. program memory when the PLC is switched on to enable actual operations 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 6 Online Module Change Online module change is a function to change the Q Series module mounted on the main or extension base unit during control of the PLC system If a module fails during control it can be changed to the same type module by using this function 1 An online module change does not add a module or change it for a module of another type 2 To perform an online module change using a Process CPU in a multiple CPU system Enable online module change for other CPU must be selected in the multiple CPU setting dialog box on the PLC parameter screen There are restrictions on the versions of the CPU modules that configure a multiple CPU system For details refer to the Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 3 Perform an online module change after making sure that the system outside the PLC will not malfunction 4 It is necessary to turn OFF the external power for the module changed online to prevent an electric shock or like 1 Conditions for performing online module change An online module change is available under the following conditions a Online changeable modules The following table indicates online changeable modules Module Type Input module Output module No restrictions I O mixed module Analog digital converter module Intell
38. refer to the section of online module change in this manual Do not drop or give an impact to the battery installed in the module Otherwise the battery will be broken possibly causing internal leakage of electrolyte Do not use but dispose of the battery if it has fallen or an impact is given to it DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS A CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Apr 2002 SH NA 080314E A First edition Oct 2002_ SH NA 080314E B Japanese Manual Version SH 080263 B This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property ights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series of General Purpose Programmable Controllers Please read this manual carefully so that equipment is used to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS vriatas anaanatae aariaa aTa aaaea LAAT ued aaea Ara Saharo aas TARAS A 1 PREV SIONS AEE E E E E A A 6 CONTENT Sae shat a hate a a a a a a a a gi An ea a Na ae a A 7 About Mantals a A AAE AAA AATA NR A 17 How to Use This Manual isiende a E E
39. 1 ON BD through BF are vacant e The following bit patterns are used to store the statuses of the LEDs on the CPU B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO T T ii T T T T T T T T T 4 gt lt gt 4 gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt SD201 LED status Status 0f CPU IO BOOT S Status New QCPU LED Vacant change H Vacant i i MODE Bit patterns for MODE 0 OFF 1 Green 2 Orange e The operating status of the remote I O module is stored in the following format B15 lt 4 The CPU module operating status is stored as indicated in the following figure B15 B12B11 B8 B7 Operating Operating Status ot status of CPU CPU Operating status of CPU S Every END STOP PAUSE cause Switch processing Remote contact Remote operation from the GX Developer or Serial Communication Internal program instruction Note Priority is earliest first Errors D9015 format change 11 65 11 65 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding i 5 Set by Corresponding N N M Expl umber eaning xplanation When set ACPU CPU D9 IT 0 Test not yet executed Device test t punn gX P device test Y i S execution 4 Set when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer New Rem y 2 During Y Request device test 3 During X Y device test When error is generat
40. 10H 0 Automatic mode d Base mode g Stores the base mode S Initial New 1 Detail mode No of 0 Main base only i ak 1 to 7 No of Stores the maximum number of the extension bases unit being extension A S Initial New extension installed bases bases B2 B1 BO Base type yp i Fixed to 0 differentiation 0 QA Bis gt Main base unit 1st extension A Q base installed base onsion S Initia en O Rem differentiation A mode gt base N When no extension 1 Q Bis to base is installed the installed value is fixed to 0 Jo 7th extension Q mode base BIS B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO SD243 Extension 3 Extension 2 Extension 1 Main No of base SD244 Extension 7 Extension 6 Extension 5 Extension 4 S Initial slots i SD240 D243 e As shown above each area stores the number of slots being installed D250 Loaded Loaded maximum When SM250 goes from OFF to ON the upper 2 digits of the final S Request New O4Rem maximum I O I O No I O number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values END N f l umber or mogues Indicates the number of modules installed on MELSECNET H installed VO No e MELSECNET H I O number of first module installed S Initial New D244 n n n n n n oO g N NO A A N a n MELSECNET H group number of first module installed MELSECNETHH station number of first module installed In the
41. 11 7 Special Register List 11 58 The special registers SD are internal registers with fixed applications in the PLC For this reason it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same way that normal registers are used However data can be written as needed in order to control the CPU modules and remote I O modules Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has been made to the contrary The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings Function of Item Name e Indicates name of special register e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user Sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Set by When set Indicated only for registers set by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU D9 _ _ __ Change and notation when there has been a change in contents e Items indicated as New
42. 44 1mm 1 74inch Mounting screw M4 x 14 4 pieces DIN rail mounting adapter sold separately DIN rail mounting Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 Adapter type 6 2 Extension Cable Specification Table Attachment The list below shows the specifications of the extension cables which can be used for the Process CPU system es QC05B QCO06B QC30B QC50B QC100B Cable length 0 45m 1 48ft 0 6m 1 97ft 1 2m 3 93ft 3 0m 9 84ft 5 0m 16 38ft 10 0m 32 79ft Application Connection across the main base unit and extension base unit or across the extension base units 0 15 kg 0 16 kg 0 22 kg 0 40 kg 0 60 kg 1 11kg When the extension cables are used in combination limit the overall distance of the combined cable to 13 2 m 43 28 ft 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 3 Parts Names of Base Unit The names of the parts of the base unit are described below 1 Main base unit Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Application 1 Extension cable Connector for sending and receiving signals from the extension base unit to which the connector extension cables are connected Protective cover of extension cable connector Before an extension cable is connected 2 Base cover the area of the base cover surround
43. CC Link Information Information 0 10 10 gt B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo Vacant Information 1st module 2nd module 3rd module 4th module Stores the number of points currently set for X devices Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices Stores the number of points currently set for M devices Stores the number of points currently set for L devices Stores the number of points currently set for B devices Stores the number of points currently set for F devices S Initial Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices Stores the number of points currently set for V devices Stores the number of points currently set for S devices Stores the number of points currently set for T device Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices e Stores the number of points currently set for C devices Stores the number of points currently set for D devices Stores the number of points currently set for W devices S Initial e Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices Reserves the designated time for communication processing with GX Developer or other units The greater the value is designated the shorter the response time for communication with other devices GX Developer serial communication units becomes The scan time becomes longer by the designated time Setting range 1 to 100 ms
44. Do not remove modules printed circuit boards from the enclosure in order to avoid changes in operation 3 Tighten the module fixing screws and terminal block screws within the tightening torque range specified below 4 Be sure to install the power supply module in the Q30B Q60B and QA1S6LB Even if the power supply module is not installed when the I O modules and intelligent function module installed on the base units are of light load type the modules may be operated In this case because a voltage becomes unstable we cannot guarantee the operation 5 When an extension cable is used do not bind the cable together with the main circuit high voltage heavy current line or lay them close to each other 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 6 Install the main base unit by screwing in the following procedure 1 Fit the two base unit top mounting screws into the enclosure Panel 2 Place the right hand side notch of the base unit onto the right hand side screw Panel 3 Place the left hand side pear shaped hole onto the left hand side screw TAT 0 0 Panel 4 Fit the mounting screws into the mounting screw holes in the base unit bottom and retighten the four mounting screws Note 1 Install the main base unit to a panel with no module loaded in the right end slot Remove the base unit after unloading the module from the right end slot 9 LOA
45. I O terminals e Stores the MINI S3 link error detection status in the mounted MELSECNET MINI S3 master module B15 to B8 B7 to 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 817 6 5 4 3 A a On the PLC CPU and A 1S J71PT32 S3 side the bit corresponding to the A 1S J71PT32 S3 that cannot make data communication turns ON Bits which correspond to the signals of A 1S J71PT32 S3 shown below are turned on as the signals are turned on Hardware error X0 X20 MINI S3 link error datection X6 X26 MINI S3 link communication error X7 X27 e Turned ON if instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs when AC power supply module is used and reset when power is switched OFF then ON e Turned ON if instantaneous power failure of within 10ms occurs when DC power supply module is used and reset when power is switched OFF then ON e Turned ON if instantaneous power failure of within ims occurs when DC power supply module is used and reset when power is switched OFF then ON Self diagnosis Self diagnosis error When error is found as a result of self diagnosis error D9008 SD1008 SDO error code code is stored in BIN code F number at which Annunciator D9009 SD1009 i detection occurred Step number at D9010 SD1010 Error step which operation error has occurred 11 78 external failure has When one of FO to 2047 is turned on
46. I5 16 17 R6 16 17 R7 17 VEN The voltage supplied to IN connector of the Q50B in the final extension reaches 4 75 VDC or higher on the condition that the sum total of voltage drop to IN connector of Q50B V is 0 15V or lower 2 When the Q6LIB is connected between the Q3LIB and the Q5LIB a Selection condition 4 75VDC or higher should be supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B in the final extension b How to calculate voltage to IN connector The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4 90VDC Therefore the Q50B can be used if the voltage drop is 0 15VDC or lower 4 9VDC 4 75VDC 0 15VDC When the Q50B is connected to Extension stage 2 Extension Cable Extension Cable Main base unit Q30B Type Conductor Power Resistance Q supply module QC05B QC06B QC12B Extension stage 1 QC30B QC50B QC100B Extension base unit Q60B Extension base unit Q50B Extension stage 2 Symbol V Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit Q501B 5VDC current consumption when the Q5DB is used as Extension n 1 n 1 to 6 n Extension No of Q60B connected Sum total of current consumed by Q5LB and currents consumed by the I O intelligent function modules loaded on the Q50B Extension cable resistance between the main base unit or the extension base unit Q60B an
47. List APPENDIX 3 List of Interrupt Pointer Nos and Interrupt Factors INDEX About Manuals The following manuals are related to this product Referring to this list please request the necessary manuals Related Manuals Manual Name Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals This manual explains the functions programming methods devices and so on necessary to create programs with the Process CPU QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions This manual describes how to use the sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC This manual explains the system configuration performance specifications functions programming debugging error codes and others of MELSAP3 QCPU Q Mode Programming Manual MELSAP L This manual describes the programming methods specifications functions and so on that are Sold separately necessary to create the MELSAP L type SFC programs QnPHCPU Programming Manual Process Control Instructions This manual describes the programming procedures device names and other items necessary to implement PID control using process control instructions Sold separately Sold separately Sold separately Sold separately Manual Number Model Code SH 080315E 13JR56 SH 080039 13JF58 SH 080041 13JF60 SH 080076 13JF61 SH 080316E 13JF67 How to Us
48. Looseness of Try to further tighten screws Screws must not be loose Screws must not be loose tbeloose Further tighten rther Further tighten terminal screws with a screwdriver Proximity of solderless terminals Check visually Solderless terminals must oe Correct to eachother positioned at proper intervals Sooseness of Check visually Connectors must not be loose Further tighten connector connectors fixing screws Even if the lowering of a battery capacity is not shown replace the battery with a new one if a specified service life of the battery is exceeded Dirt and foreign matter must Remove and clean not be present Check visually Connection check on the monitor mode of the GX Developer that SM51 or Preventive maintenance SM52 is turned OFF 10 3 10 3 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 3 Battery Replacement 10 4 When the voltage of the program and power interrupt hold on function backup battery is lowered the special relays SM51 and SM52 are energized Even if these special relays are energized the contents of the program and power interrupt hold on function are not erased immediately If the energization of these relays is recognized however these contents may be deleted unintentionally While a total of the power interrupt hold on time after the SM51 is energized is within a specified time replace the battery with a new one POINTS The SM51 is used to give an ala
49. O allocation setting to conform to the actual status of the intelligent function module and the CPU module 2 Delete the general purpose switch settings 1 Reduce the number of QI60 module loaded in the single CPU system to one 2 Change the number of QI60 module set to the same control PLC to only one in the multiple CPU system Remove the Ql60 Reduce the number of modules to four or less in the whole multiple CPU system 1 Keep the number to 4 or fewer 2 Keep the number to 4 or fewer 3 Check the network numbers and station numbers 2107 Head X Y set in the parameter I O allocation settings is also the Reset the parameter I O allocation setting to conform with the actual O head X Y for another module status of the intelligent function modules Rem x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 24 11 24 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LED Status Operating FER FDO Goce Error Messages Information Information LED Statis Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 ERROR CPU E SP UNIT ERROR Unit module No Program error location Off On Flicker On Continue When instruction executed am 11 Unit module No p SP UNIT ERROR Em Program error location Off On Flicker On Continue aen ee executed 2 ms FFFFu FFFFa fixed 2114 fans ans op UNIT E
50. POSEN etme x A maximum of 4 modules if the network parameters for CC Link are set and controlled by the GX Developer There is no restriction in the number of modules when the parameters are set by the special purpose instructions for the CC Link For details on the CC Link System Master Local Unit that can set parameters with the special purpose instructions refer to the user s manual for the CC Link Master Local module network module c A graphic operation terminal can be used only for the GOT900 series Basic OS matching Q mode and communication driver must be installed The GOT800 series A77GOT and A64GOT cannot be used 2 Software package You can use GX Developer Version 7 10L or later to create the programs of the Process CPU Do not use GX Developer Version 7 09K or earlier 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Version The CPU module serial No can be confirmed on the rated plate and GX Developer s system monitor 1 Confirming the serial No on the rated plate The serial No and function version can be confirmed on the rating plate a MITSUBISHI MODEL Function version SERIAL 0401 U LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ C MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN J Serial No First five digits 2 Confirming the serial No on the system monitor list of product information The CPU module serial No and func
51. START by PROG RAM a TM be established SW RAI No H as e O Lio MC STOP i eH sw START PROGRAM INPUT MODULE SW 7 TAS a ee o Toe O H MC STOP eoo O t SW OUTPUT MODULE Low battery alarm Ym op Lamp or buzzer Voltage relay is oOo RAt switched ON by recommended y SM403 AE run monitor relay z OUTPUT MODULE Low battery alarm OUTPUT MODULE MC fe eet Lamp or buzzer uct a Ni 4 N Power to output equipment ON when run by ar switched OFF when the SM403 jl STOP signal is given Yn O Inthe case of an i emergency stop or a aes MC2 T stop caused by a limit as switch OUTPUT MODULE mc Lmc MC1 Interlock circuits as Ke et aca gt necessary Provide Power to output ae external interlock equipment p ee a circuits for conflicting switched OFF operations such as when the STOP forward rotation and signal is given reverse rotation and f for parts that could In the case of an damage the machine emergency stop or a stop caused by a limit switch or cause accidents if no interlock were used The power ON procedure is as follows For AC For AC DC 1 Switch power ON 1 Switch power ON 2 Set CPU to RUN 2 Set CPU to RUN 3 Turn ON the start switch 3 When DC power is established RA2 goes ON 4 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output 4 Timer TM times out after the DC power reaches 100 equipment is powered and may be driven by the progr
52. This section describes possible problems with input circuits and their corrective actions Input Circuit Problems and Corrective Actions P Condition Cause Corrective Action e Leakage current of input switch e g drive by non contact switch AC input s Leakage r current Power supply Input module e Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp AC input Leakage Power supply e Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring cable Line capacity C of twisted pair wire is approx 100 PF m AC input Leakage Es Input module Power supply Drive by switch with LED indicator DC input plus common Leakage curent Input module Connect an appropriate resistor which will make the voltage across the terminals of the input module lower than the OFF voltage AC input Input module It is recommended to use 0 1 to 47 UF 47 to 120Q 1 2W for the CR constant e Same as Example 1 e Or make up another independent display circuit e Same as Example 1 However leakage current is not generated when the power supply is located in the input equipment side as shown below AC input Input module _ Power supply e Connect a register which will make the voltage between the input module terminal and common lower than the OFF voltage as shown below DC input plus common Resistor sae Input module A calculation example of a value for a connected resistor is give
53. etails CPU When SM803 is turned ON OFF by peripheral device to activate sampling trace STRA STRAR value stored in SD1044 is used as sampling trace condition For scan For time Time 10ms increments Value is stored into SD1044 in BIN code Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is used as the work area for the execution of a SFC program in a binary value Stores 0 if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller which cannot be expansion file register No 1 is used or if SM320 is OFF Stores code numbers of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN code 0 No error 80 SFC program parameter error 81 SFC code error 82 Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded 83 Block start error 84 SFC program operation error Stores the block number in which an error occurred in the SFC program in BIN code In the case of error 83 the starting block number is stored Stores the step number in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in BIN code Stores 0 when errors 80 81 and 82 occurred Stored the block starting step number when error 83 occurred e Stores the transfer condition number in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in BIN code Stored 0 when errors 80 81 82 and 83 occurred Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in BIN code Stores the step number when status latch is execute
54. fix to the base unit M3 X 12 screw Module fixing latch Hook used to fix to the base unit For connection of battery lead wires 18 Battery connector pin When shipped from the factory the lead wires are disconnected from the connector to prevent the battery from consuming 19 Batter Backup battery for use of program memory standard RAM and power failure y compensation function 1 1 When normally connecting a cable to the USB connector or RS 232 connector clamp the cable to prevent it from coming off due to the dangling moving or carelessly pulling of the cable Q6HLD R2 type RS 232 Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder is available as a clamp for RS 232 connector CPU module RS 232 cable 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 3 Switch Operation After Writing in Program When writing a program into the CPU module do not turn off the system protect set switch SW1 in advance When the switch is turned off the system will not be protected 1 When a program is written while CPU module is stopped When a program is written while the CPU module is stopped operate the switch in the order shown below 1 RUN STOP switch STOP RUN LED Turns off CPU module in stop status Write a program 2 RESET L CLR switch Tilt this switch to RESET once and return it to the original center position 3 RUN STOP switch STOP gt RUN RUN LED Turns on CPU module in running stat
55. for connection with USB compatible peripheral device Connector type B PEP connection a Can be connected by USB dedicated cable Connector for RS 232 connection 12 RS 232 1 Can be connected by RS 232 connection cable QC30R2 Used to set the items for operation of the CPU module For system protection and parameter valid drive functions refer to the Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals DIP switches SW1 Used to set system protection Batch inhibits write and control directives to the CPU module Shipped in OFF position OFF No protection ON _ Protection SW2 SW3 Used to specify parameter valid drive Both SW2 and SW3 are shipped in OFF position Standard ROM Drive 4 Note Parameters cannot be stored in standard RAM Drive 3 RUN STOP switch RUN _ Executes sequence program operation STOP Stops sequence program operation RESET Used to perform hardware reset operation fault rest operation initialization etc If this switch is left in the RESET position the whole system will be reset and 15 RESET L CLR switch the system will not operate properly After performing reset always return this switch to the neutral position L CLR Used to turn OFF or zero all data in the parameter set latch area Used to clear the sampling trace and status latch registration Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to
56. main base unit with an extension cable always plug the OUT side connector of the main base unit and the IN side connector of the extension base unit with an extension cable The system will not operate properly if the extension cable is connected in the form of IN to IN OUT to OUT or IN to OUT When connecting two or more extension base units plug the OUT side connector of the first extension base unit and the IN side connector of the second extension base unit with an extension cable 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q a To connect an extension cable to the main base unit remove the portion under the OUT characters on the base cover with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver 5 5 x 75 6 x 100 This also applies to a case where an extension cable is connected to the OUT side connector of the extension base unit OUT side of extension base unit Main base unit Q IN OUT Base cover 7 elZ e x 5 b To connect the extension cable to the next extension base unit remove the seal applied under the IN characters on the base cover IN side of extension base unit c When plugging the extension cable to any base unit hold the connector part of the extension cable Be d After fitting the extension cable always tighten the extension cable connector fixing screws Tightening torque 20N cm he 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION Z g
57. network module In a multiple CPU system the Q series Ethernet interface module under control of another station is specified as the first O number of the Ethernet setting parameter 3102 Though the number of Ethernet module is set to one or more in the parameter the actually mounted number of units is zero The head I O number for the Ethernet module set parameter is different from that of the actually mounted module Ethernet and MELSECNET 10 use the same network number Network number station number or group number set by the parameter is out of range I O number is out of range In a multiple CPU system the Q series CC Link module under control of another station is specified as the first O number of the CC Link setting parameter 1 Though the number of CC Link module set in the network parameters is one or more the actually mounted number of units is zero 2 The head I O number in the common parameters is different from that of the actually mounted module 3 The station class for the CC Link module quantity set parameters is different from that of the actually mounted station The CC Link link refresh range exceeded the file register capacity The network refresh parameter for CC Link is out of range 3107 3200 The parameter contents are incorrect 3201 The contents of the SFC block attribute information are incorrect The number of step relays designated in the parameters is less than the number u
58. occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 1 x 11 19 11 19 11 TR OUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres Topo at Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding SD0 x CPU 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 Failure of the power supply module CPU module main base unit extension base unit or extension cable is detected 1010 1011 1012 Run mode suspended or failure of main CPU module 1 Measure noise level 1 Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason 2 Reset and establish the RUN status again 2 Hardware fault If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware error Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Entire program was executed without the execution of an END instruction 1 When the END instruction is executed it is read as another 1 Measure noise level 2 Reset and establish the RUN status again instruction code e g due to noise If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU O 2 The END instruction has been changed to another instruction m dule hardwareiertor Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative code somehow Error in program memory where CPU module sequence program is 1101 stored T102 Error in RAM used as CPU work area This suggests a CPU module hardware error Contact your nearest 1103 Internal CPU device error Mits bishi representative 1104 RAM Address err
59. poa adro normal New y 9 P When Process CPU is used this flag is always OFF because occurred memory card B is used as standard memory Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85 AC Number of times for power 65 DC power of the rating during calculation of the AC DOWN CPU module the value is incremented by 1 and stored in BIN S Error D9005 O Rem code Blown fuse Number of module e Value stored here is the lowest station I O number of the module epee with blown fuse with the blown fuse S Erron Dao VO module 1 O module O Rem Fh ns pn The lowest I O number of the module where the I O module SD61 verification _ verification error verification number took place S Error D9002 error number module number A S SD62 Annu ci tor jAnnuneiat r The first annunciator number to be detected is stored here Instruction D9009 number number f execution S Number of Number of i z SD63 Stores the number of annunciators searched Destin D9124 11 63 11 63 11 SD64 Annunciator detection number D80 CHK number CHK number n D90 n D91 n D92 T Step transition watchdog timer setting value Enabled only when SFC program exists n D93 F number for timer set value and time over error n D94 ie D95 n D96 n D97 n D98 n D99 CH1 transmission speed setting RS 232 transmission speed when GX Developer is used D g lo oa
60. program error location and correct the problem The configuration of the check conditions for the CHK instruction is incorrect Alternatively a CHK instruction has been used in a low speed execution program 4400 No SFCP or SFCPEND instruction in SFC program 4410 The block number designated by the SFC program exceeds the Read common error information at a GX Developer check error range step corresponding to its numerical value program error location 4411 Block number designations overlap in SFC program and correct the problem 4420 A step number designated in an SFC program exceeds 511 4421 Total number of steps in all SFC programs exceed the range Reduce total number of steps to below the maximum Read common error information at a GX Developer check error 4422 Step number designations overlap in SFC program step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem are not equal 4501 The configuration of the STEP gt x to TRAN gt x to TSET to SEND instructions in the SFC program is incorrect Read common error information at a GX Developer check error 4502 There was no STEPI instruction in SFC program block step corresponding to its numerical value program error location does not exist does not exist 4600 The SFC program contains data that cannot be processed Read common error information at a GX Developer check error 4601 Exceeds device range that can be designated by th
61. s rated voltage and the terminal layout Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools or correctly soldered Imperfect connections could result in short circuit fires or erroneous operation Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it could result in short circuits fire or erroneous operation Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause shock or erroneous operation Correctly connect the battery Also do not charge disassemble heat place in fire short circuit or solder the battery Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires
62. several 10 ms max 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 6 Installation of Battery For CPU Module and Memory Card 1 The battery for the CPU module is shipped with its connector disconnected Connect the connector as follows Refer to Section 10 3 for the service life of the battery and how to replace the battery Open the cover at the CPU module s bottom Side of the CPU module Confirm that the battery is loaded correctly Front Insert the battery connector into the connector pin on the case Be sure that the insertion direction is correct Connector Completion Bottom Battery 2 The battery for the SRAM card is shipped separately from the battery holder Before installing the SRAM card into the CPU module set the battery holder in the following procedure Model name Set the battery holder s locking switch on m side Battery holder s locking switch to the RELEASE position OC lt _ Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card RELEASE position Set the battery onto the battery holder with the plus face up Insert the battery holder with which the battery is installed firmly into the SRAM card Confirm that the battery holder s locking switch is set to the LOCK position LOCK position The battery holder s locking switch is set Completion auto
63. speed processing has been realized Example when LD instruction is used Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 034 us In addition an access to the intelligent function module or an increase in speed of the link refresh of the network have been realized by the connection system System bus connection of the newly developed base unit Access to the intelligent function module 20 xus word approx 7 times 1 MELSECNETHH link refresh processing 4 6ms 8k word approx 4 3 times 1 1 Where Q25PHCPU is compared with Q4ARCPU Increase in debugging efficiency through high speed communication with GX Developer In the Process CPU a time required for writing reading of a program or monitoring has been reduced through the high speed communication at a speed of 115 2kbps max by the RS 232 and a communication time efficiency at the time of debugging has been increased In the Process CPU a high speed communication at a speed of 12Mbps is allowed through the USB 26k step program transfer time Q25PHCPU USB 12 Q25PHCPU RS 232 30 Q4ARCPU iT 86 A2USHCPU S1 o 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Unit s 1 OVERVIEW Comparison MELSEC Q 11 Saved space by a reduction in size The installation space for Q series has been reduced by approx 60 of the space for AnS series of installation space Hey MELSEC A1s62P MELSEC A1SHcpu STOP RUN ICLR RUN ERROR RESET RESET MITSUBISHI 0X10 POWER
64. station verification error JON Error modules Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to SD1123 are reset OFF Normal Turned on when the MINI S3 link error is detected on M9004 SM1004 NIMI link error even one of the MELSECNET MINI master modules QnA ON Error i p being loaded Remains on if normal status is restored Comes ON it a momentary power interruption of less than 20ms occurred during use of the AC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON i Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less M9005 sm1005 A aw ns BOWN POPE than 10ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less than 1ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON 11 51 11 51 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details Relay Conversion Modification OFF Normal e Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than SM1006 Battery low specified Turned off when battery voltage becomes ON Battery low normal OFF Normal Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than Sd Battery lowlaich ON Battery low specified Remains on if battery voltage becomes normal SM1008 SM1 Self diagnosis OFF No error Turned on when error is found as a result of self
65. the CPU module and 128k points of the file registers can be handled by the standard RAM 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 14 Data can be written automatically to standard ROM You need not use GX Developer to write parameters programs on a memory card to the standard ROM of the Process CPU When the standard ROM is used to perform ROM operation you can load a memory card into the Process CPU and write parameters programs on the memory card to the standard ROM Hence you need not carry GX Developer personal computer to rewrite the parameters programs 15 External I O can be turned ON OFF forcibly If the Process CPU is in the RUN mode you can operate GX Developer to turn external inputs outputs ON OFF forcibly independently of the program execution status You need not put the Process CPU in the STOP mode to perform wiring operation tests by forced ON OFF of outputs 16 Remote password can be set When access to an Ethernet module or serial communication module is made externally whether access to the Process CPU can be made or not can be selected with a remote password H to configure an MELSECNET H remote I O system In addition to the remote password there are the following protection facilities for the Process CPU a Protection of the whole CPU module by making system protection settings of the Process CPU b Protection of the memory card by setting the write protect switch of the memory card c File by file protection us
66. the PLC and devices that generate noise or heat contactors and relays e Required clearance in front of PLC atleast 100 mm 8 94 inch e Required clearance on the right and leftof PLC at least 50 mm 1 97 inch At least 50mm 1 97 inch 1 97 inch 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 3 3 Installation and removal of module This section explains how to install and remove a power supply CPU I O intelligent function or another module to and from the base unit 1 Installation and removal of the module from Q30B Q50B and Q60B The installation and removal of the module from Q30B Q6LB base unit are described below a Installation of module on Q30B Q50B and Q60B Base unit Base unit Module Insert the module fixing latch into the module fixing hole of the base unit Module connector Module loading lever Push the module in the direction of arrow to load it Module into the base unit Module fixing fixing latch hole i Module fixing hole Make sure that the module is inserted in the base unit securely a Completion D POINTS 1 Always insert the module fixing latch of the module into the module fixing hole Forcing the hook into the hole will damage the module connector and module 2 When using the PLC in a place where there is large vibration or impact screw the CPU module to the base unit Module fixing screw M3 x 1
67. the Process CPU only one memory card can be installed 1 SRAM card ee ee ee Memory capacity after format 1011 5 kbyte 2034 kbyte Storable number of files al 45mm 1 77inch External dimensions 42 8mm 1 69inch I bD 3 3mm 0 13inch 15g 2 Flash card 7 5000 times H 45mm 1 77inch External dimensions 42 8mm 1 69inch 3 3mm 0 13inch 3 ATA card Pe TE Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA Memory capacity after format 7940 kbyte 15932 n 31854 kbyte Storable number of files Number of insertions and extractions 5000 times Number of writings 1000000 times 45mm 1 77inch External dimensions 42 8mm 1 69inch 3 3mm 0 13inch 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 2 Battery Specifications For CPU Module and SRAM Card 1 For CPU module Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Classification Initial voltage 3 0V Nominal current 1800mAh 10 years room temperature Total power interrupt p Refer to Section 10 3 1 Power failure backup for program memory standard RAM and latch devices 2 For SRAM card Classification Graphite fluoride primary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Nominal current 48mAh Storage life 5 years room temperature Total power interrupt p p Refer to Section 10 3 1 Power failure backup for SRAM card Refer to Section 10 3 1 for the service life of the battery 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC
68. the remote password hange the first O number of the target module to within the 0H to file is set to other than OH to OFFOn OFFOH range Position specified as the first O number of the remote password file is incorrect due to one of the following reasons Module is not loaded Load the QU71C24 R2 or Q series Ethernet interface module of Intelligent function module other than QU71C24 R2 or Q series function version B in the position specified as the first I O number of Ethernet interface module the remote password file e QU71C24 R2 or Q series Ethernet interface module of function version A QJ71C24 R2 or Q series Ethernet interface module of function version B under control of another station is specified in a multiple CPU system In a multiple CPU system automatic refresh setting or similar parameter setting was made to the intelligent function module under control of another station hange the setting to the QU71C024 R2 or Q series Ethernet interface module of function version B under control of the host station 2 Delete the remote password setting 4000 The program contains an instruction code that cannot be decoded An unusable instruction is included in the program Read the common error information at a GX Developer check error although it is not an SFC program step corresponding to its numerical value program error location visi cis incorrect instruction name incorrect number of devices Read the com
69. the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 E
70. the whole system will always operate safely Also before exercising other control program change operating status change status control on the running PLC read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program corrective and other actions to be taken as a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between the external device and PLC CPU A CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation When controlling items like lamp load heater or solenoid valve using an output module large current approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances may flow when the output is turned OFF to ON Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current When the PLC power supply is switched ON OFF correct control output may not be performed temporarily due to differences in delay time and starting time between the PLC power supply and the external power supply for the controlled object especial
71. tis eth eat Mes ls ides ei dase cat Aig ty card hs ea Necessity 8 5 8 2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive eee eseeeeeeeesneseeeeeesesasnetaeeesereeeate 8 6 8 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC Q series PLO cceceeeceececeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeecaeseeeeaesaesaeeeeesaetaeeeeseeeaee 8 6 8 2 2 MELSEC Q series PLC selection cecceceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeceeseaesaesaesaseaesaesaeseeeeaeeesaneaeeas 8 6 8 2 3 IPOWGMSUPDIY shevesccts E A sooth entered es seed etre dee vee etree tee eet ened O yl ve eect etre daly 8 7 8 2 A COmtrOl DOK AEREN AE stadt bennate vba tacts guqetshectedh basnate sta tect cpext aug ste AT 8 7 872 5 Grounding fe eiee eet An Mek A Sle a i A Sal a as an a 8 8 8 2 6EXxtermal WING aaa a aa Aa A AAA TA EAA RAAT AATAS 8 8 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 9 1 to 9 23 9 1 General Safety ReguirementS issen ingerir ensena aea aaae a aaaea e a asi aa akadai aniidae 9 1 9 2 Calculating Heat Generation by PLC eceeeecceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeecaeceeeeeeeaecaeseeeeaeeaesaeseessaesaeseseaesaneeseateaees 9 6 9 3 Module Installation ensnare ee ee A ee eee A ee ee 9 9 9 3 1 Precaution on installation ee ee ceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeeeaeeeatenas 9 9 9 3 2 Instructions for Mounting the base Unit eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeas 9 12 9 3 3 Installation and removal Of module ee eeeeeeeeee
72. to the numerical values parameter numbers there and correct when necessary 2 If the error is still generated following the correction of the parameter settings it is likely that there is a memory error either in the standard RAM or on the memory card Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1 Read the error detailed information at the GX Developer check the parameter items corresponding to the numerical values parameter numbers there and correct when necessary 2 If the error is still generated following the correction of the parameter settings it is likely that there is a memory error either in the internal CPU RAM or on the memory card Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Match preset count of multi CPU setting CPU empty setting in I O assignment with the actual number of CPUs loaded Match the multi CPU setting or control CPU setting in the parameter with that of the reference station station 1 Check the following in the multi CPU automatic refresh parameters and make correction 1 When specifying the bit device specify a multiple of 16 for the refresh starting device a 3 Specify the device that may be specified for the refresh device 3 Set the number of send points to an even number Make sure that the online module change parameter matches the machine number of the unit that is used as the standard Disable the online module change settings when a CPU that doesn t su
73. together with the main circuit high voltage and heavy current line or do not lay down them closely to each other 4 When setting the No of the expansion stages set it in the ascending order so that the same No is not set simultaneously by two extension base units 5 Although there are no particular restrictions in the order of the installation of the Q650B and Q6LB refer to Section 6 6 for usability 6 Connect the extension cable from OUT of the extension cable connector of the base unit to IN of the extension base unit on the next stage 7 If 65 or more modules are installed an error will occur 8 The Process CPU cannot use the slim type main base unit Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB 4096 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration This section describes hardware and software packages compatible with Process CPU 1 Hardware a The Process CPU can be used with the MELSEC Q series I O and intelligent function modules It cannot be used with the MELSEC AnS Q2AS series I O and special function modules b The number of modules to be installed and functions are limited depending on the type of the modules F e QJ71BR11 Up to 4 inter PLC network Q Series MELSECNET 10H QJ71LP21 25 and remote I O network modules in total f e QJ71E71 e Ethernet interface QJ71E71 B2 Up to 4 units e QJ71E71 100 Q series CC Link system QJ61BT11 Nome limit master local module r
74. type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel The tests for the corresponding items were performed while the PLC was installed inside a control panel 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive The PLC is open equipment and must be installed within a control cabinet for use This not only ensures safety but also ensures effective shielding of PLC generated electromagnetic noise 1 Control cabinet a b Use a conductive control cabinet When attaching the control cabinet s top plate or base plate mask painting and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the cabinet and plate c To ensure good electrical contact with the control cabinet mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control cabinet so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area Earth the control cabinet with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies Holes made in the control cabinet must be 10 cm 3 94 inch diameter or less If the holes are 10 cm 3 94 inch or larger radio frequency noise may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit reduce the clearance as much as practicable The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct applicati
75. used system heck the network parameters and the installation state If inconsistency is found arrange consistency between the network parameters and the installation state If network parameters are changed write the new network parameters to the CPU module Check the number of extension stages of the extension base unit Check the connection state of the extension base unit and connector If the display unit is connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the connection state If the error persists after the above items 1 to 3 are checked the hardware is faulty Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative and explain the symptom Use a module that supports the MELSECNET H multi remote I O network Write after correcting network parameters If the error persists after corrections have been made contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Delete the Ethernet setting parameter of the Q series Ethernet interface module under control of another station Change the setting to the first I O number of the Q series Ethernet interface module under control of the host station 7 2 Write after correcting network parameters If the error persists after corrections have been made contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Write after correcting network parameters If the error persists after corrections have been made contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Delete the CC Link setting parameter
76. value set LA rer oa 5001 5010 PRG TIME OVER Time value set Ler STEP EXE ERROR Program error location When instruction is executed Off On Flicker Stop Always On Continue Always x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 5011 11 33 11 33 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres obo at Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU 4210 The CALL instruction is executed but there is no subroutine at the j specified pointer Read the common error information at a GX Developer check error 4211 There was no RET instruction in the executed sub routine program step corresponding to its numerical value program error location The RET instruction was before the FEND instruction in the main and correct the problem 4212 program 4213 More than 16 nesting levels are programmed Keep nesting levels at 16 or under 4220 Interrupt input was generated but no corresponding interrupt pointer was found 4221 There was no IRET instruction in the executed interrupt program 4223 The IRET instruction was before the FEND instruction in the main program Read the common error information at a GX Developer check error The number of CHK and CHKEND instructions is not equal step corresponding to its numerical value
77. your nearest Mitsubishi representative 3 F Eliminate empty slots between the CPU modules Set empty iowa e locations in a multiple CPU system are either of the slots on the right side of the CPU modules e A Remove the modules which are not the High Performance o ee E ih High Penoeiance CPU module model QCPU modules loaded between the High Performance QCPU Process CPU such as motion controller or PC CPU model QCPU modules and fit the slots with the High par Performance model QCPUs module is installed at the left side of the High Performance i model QCPU Process CPU Load the motion controller modules on the right side of the High Performance model QCPUs hange the intelligent function module for the one compatible with the multiple CPU system function version B 2 Change the setting of the control CPU of the intelligent function module incompatible with the multiple CPU system to station 1 heck and correct the setting of the parameter enabled drive 2200 There is no parameter file at the drive designated by DIP switches switch as a valid drive Put a parameter file in the drive designated by the parameter enabled drive switch 2210 1 nei eae was Tomoveg without switching the memory 1 Remove memory card after placing the memory card in out eee switch OFF 2 Lee ecient is turned ON although a memory 5 Turn on the card insert switch after inserting a memory card 1 The memory card has not been formatted
78. 0 after end of low speed one scan Execution time of low speed program during one scan is stored into SD546 SD547 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD546 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD547 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Stored every scan e Execution time of scan program during one scan is stored into SD548 SD549 Measurement is made in 100ys increments SD548 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD549 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Stored every scan e Sets I O number for module that measures service interval e Service intervals for the module specified in SD550 are stored into SD551 SD552 when SM551 is turned ON Measurement is made in 1001s increments SD551 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD552 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Set by When set S First END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Request Corresponding ACPU be TT MELSEC Q Corresponding CPU 11 72 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Memory SD600 card A models Drive 1 SD602 RAM capacity Drive 2 SD603 ROM capacity Memory card A use SD604 conditions Memory SD620 card B models Drive 3 SD622 RAM capacity SD623 Drive 3 4 SD624 juse conditions 11 73 Special Register List 5 Memory card Explanation e Indi
79. 2 user prepared 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q b Removal from Q30B Q50B and Q60B Base unit Hold the module with both hands and push the hook on the top of the module with a finger until it stops Module connector While pushing the hook and using the bottom of the module as a support pull the module toward you Lift the module upwards and remove the module fixing latch from the module fixing hole g Completion D When the module fixing screw is used always remove the module by removing the module fixing screw and then taking the module fixing latch off the module fixing hole of the base unit Do not try to remove the module forcibly since this may damage the module 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unit When using two or more extension base units their stage numbers must be set with their stage number setting connectors Extension 1 need not be set since the extension number is factory set to 1 Make this setting in the following procedure 1 The stage number setting connector of the extension base unit is located under the IN side base cover Refer to Section 6 4 for the setting of the extension number setting connector First loosen the upper and lower screws in the IN side base cover and remove the base cover from the extension base unit 2 Insert the connector pin in the r
80. 22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 SD1222 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 SD1223 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 L49 If a local station acting as the master station of tier three detects a parameter error or a remote station contains an invalid I O assignment the bit corresponding to the station number becomes 1 Example When local station 5 and remote I O station 14 detect an error bits 4 and 13 in SD1220 become 1 and when SD1220 is monitored its value is 8208 2010n Stores the local or remote station numbers while they are communicating the initial data with their relevant master station Device Bit number b8 b5 SD1224 Hs uA SD1225 30 2 oF 5 SD1226 i u3 801227 62 amp F EN The bit corresponding to the station number which is currently communicating the initial settings becomes 1 Example When stations 23 and 45 are communicating bit 6 of SD1225 and bit 12 of SD1226 become 1 and when SD1225 is monitored its value is 64 40x and when SD1226 is monitored its value is 4096 1000x Stores the local or remote station numbers which are in error Device Bit number b8 b5 SD1228 j bi pad sp122
81. 2288 points DO to 12287 Link register W Default 8192 points WO to 1FFF i Default 2048 points FO to 2047 Default 2048 points VO to 2047 When standard RAM is used 32768 points RO to 32767 When SRAM card 2M byte is used Up to 1041408 points are available by changing block assignment in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 When Flash card 2M byte is used Up to 1041408 points are available by changing block assignment in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 When Flash card 4M byte is used Up to 1042432 points are available by changing block assignment in When a Flash card is increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 used read only is e When standard RAM is used 32768 points ZRO to 32767 possible e When SRAM card 2M byte is used The ATA card cannot 1041408 points ZRO to 1041407 no need to change block be used assignment When Flash card 2M byte is used 1041408 points ZRO to 1041407 no need to change block assignment When Flash card 4M byte is used 1042432 points ZRO to 1042431 no need to change block assignment Timer T N 2 fe a Q A gt o ne pa D Q gt Zz 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Performance Specifications continued Item Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Special link relay SB 2048 points SBO to 7FF Special link register SW 2048 points SWO to 7FF Step relay S 8192 points SO to 8191
82. 29 30 31 stage 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 320 340 360 380 3A0 3Co 3E9 5A0 5CO SE0 600 620 640 660 680 System configuration gt g 33F 35F 37F 39F 3BF 3DF 3FF SBF SDF 5FF 61F 63F 65F 67F 69F ion base unit Q68B Extension base unit Q68B p Power supply module 7 Power supply module ena J 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 stage 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 xa 420 440 460 480 4a0 4C0 4E0 60 6C0 6E0 700 720 740 760 om SISISISISIS SISTIS ISISIS ISIS x 43F 45F 47F 49F 4BF 4DF 4FF P 6BF 6DF 6FF 71F 73F 75F 77F 79F ion base unit Q55B Extension base unit Q65B Power supply module ee g 62 63 Prohibit a oe When module is installed an error occurs Maximum number pi Seven Extension Stages Extension Stages 3 Maximum number of I O modules to be 64 modules installed Maximum number of occupied I O points Main base unit Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B xtension base unit Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B Extension cable QCO05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B 1 Extension bases unit of up to seven stages can be used 2 Do not use extension cable longer than an overall extension length of 13 2m 43 31ft 3 When using an extension cable do not bind it
83. 3 A BREAK Instruction was a although no FOR instruction step corresponding to its numerical value program error location P and correct the problem 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 32 11 32 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LEDStatus Operating aT SD oe Error Messages Information Information LED Statys Statuses of Diagnostic Timing 1 RUN ERROR CPU CAN T EXECUTE P Program error location Off When instruction is executed CAN T EXECUTE I Program error location pgg When instruction is executed INST FORMAT ERR Program error location Flicker When instruction is executed 4231 4235 A DS O 4400 __ SFCP CODE ERROR Program error location Off Flicker_ Stop STOP RUN 4410 CAN T SET BL Program error location Flicker STOP RUN 7471 4420 4421 CAN T SET S Program error location Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN 4422 4500 4501 4502 4503 SFCP FORMAT ERR Program error location Flicker STOP RUN Stop SFCP OPE ERROR Program error location Off On Flicker On Continue When instruction is executed 2 SFCP EXE ERROR Program error location STOP RUN BLOCK EXE ERROR Program error location When instruction is executed 4504 4600 4601 4602 4610 4611 4620 4621 4630 463 4632 4633 5000 WDT ERROR Time
84. 5 D9106 D9107 D9108 D9109 D9110 Step transfer monitoring timer setting D9111 D9112 D9113 D9114 D9116 D9117 D9118 D9119 VO module verification error D9091 D9094 D9100 D9120 D9122 D9123 A Wad be l 11 82 1s to 65535s According to corresponding microcomputer package Head I O number for replacement Bit pattern in units of 16 points indicating the modules whose fuses have blown Timer setting valve and the F number at time out Bit pattern in units of 16 points indicating the modules with verification errors Corresponding CPU e Sets the time check time of the data link instructions ZNRD ZNWR for the MELSECNET 10 Setting range 1 s to 65535 s 1 to 65535 e Setting unit s e Default value 10 s If O has been set default 10 s is applied For details refer to the manual of each microcomputer program package Detailed error Self diagnosis f Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error code detailed error code Stores upper 2 digits of the head I O address of I O modules to be loaded or unloaded during online mode in BIN code X2F0 H2F Output module numbers in units of 16 points of which fuses have blown are entered in bit pattern Preset output unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed 15 14131211109 8 7 6 5 4 Example Input module D1100 ol ttoloj oltyofo oj o kcoj 80 D1101 0
85. 5 to SD1028 error 7 Clock data is read from SD1025 to SD1028 and month M9027 _ SM1027 yale dete nite he day hour minute and minute are indicated on the CPU play SARP ay front LED display Clock data read OFF Ignored e Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence program to process all data communication requests Batch processing OFF Batch processing not ae during one scan in the END processing of that M9029 SM1029 of data ai ie conducted The batch processing of the data communication communications ON Batch processing k reauests eandiicted requests can be turned on and off during running q The default is OFF processed one at a time for each END processing in the order in which data communication requests are accepted 0 05 0 05 seconds V M9030 SM1030 0 1 second clock conds 04 e Generates each of 0 1 sec 0 2 sec 1 sec and 2 sec l locks M9031 SM1031 0 2 second clock seconds 0 1 c peor fewer seconds e This relay does not turn ON OFF for each scan it turns 05 ON OFF when the predefined time elapses even during seconds 0 5 scanning M9032 SM1032 Tseoand clock seconds 05 LT Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the 1 M9033 SM1033 2 second clock seconds 1 seconds seconds CPU module is reset M9034 SM1034 11 52 11 52 Data memory OFF Ignored clear flag ON Output claered Data memory OFF Ignored cl
86. 6 Meaning OFF Clear device ON Preserves device OFF OFF ON Preserves OFF Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode When ON access to the intelligent function module is completed Special Relay List Continued Explanation When Set Selects the device status when the stopped CPU module is run after the sequence program or SFC program has been modified when the SFC program exists Selects the output action of the step being held when a block is ended by executing the end step S Initial When this relay is OFF all coil outputs are set to OFF U e When this relay is ON coil outputs are maintained Select whether low speed execution type programs are executed in asynchronous or synchronous mode e Asynchronous mode Mode where the operations for the low speed execution type program are continued during the excess time e Synchronous mode Mode where the operations for the low speed execution type program are started from the next scan even when there is the excess time Stores the status of the intelligent function module access instruction executed immediately before This information will be overwritten when the intelligent function module access instruction is executed again This flag is used by the user in a program as the completion bit S Status change MELSEC Q 11 46 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 System clocks counters Special Relay List MELSEC Q Corresponding v9 OL
87. 63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L50 e If a local station goes down during the operation the contents before going down are retained Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the special register above becomes valid If the own master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained Allows a local station to confirm its own station number Number of link Stores number of D9244 SD1244 Indicates the number of slave stations in one loop device stations slave stations Number of times D9245 SD1245 communications errors detected 11 87 Stores cumulative total of receive errors Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have been detected CRC OVER AB IF Count is made to a maximum of FFFF RESET to return the count to 0 11 87 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification Stores conditions Stores the local station number which is in STOP or PAUSE D9248 SD1248 for up to numbers 1 mode to 16 Device Bit number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 Stores conditions p1248 L16 L15 L14 Lia Li2 iia Lto L9 L8 17 L6 154 13 SD1249 for up to numbers SD1249
88. 65535 SD527 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 e Current scan time of low speed program is stored into D528 SD529 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD528 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD529 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Minimum value of low speed program scan time is stored into SD532 SD533 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD532 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD533 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Maximum value of low speed program scan time with the exception of the first scan is stored into SD534 SD535 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD534 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD535 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Time from scan program end until next scan start is stored into SD540 SD541 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD540 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD541 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Corresponding ACPU DL TT Set by When set S Status change S Every END processing S Every END processing D9017 format change S Every END processing S First END processing S Every END processing S Every processing D9019 format change END processing S Every END processing N N N N D9018 format change S Every ew ew S Every END ew processing S Every END e
89. 7 SM1058 SM1059 SM1060 OFF Does not reset WDT ON Resets WDT Watchdog timer WDT reset SM802 OFF Sampling trace suspended ON Sampling trace started SMB01 Sampling trace preparations Selection of OFF Output until NULL code number of encountered characters output ON 16 characters output SM701 CHG instruction OFF Enabled execution disable ON Disable SEG instruction switch OFF 7SEG segment display ON I O partial refresh SM205 Status latch completion flag OFF Other than when P set being requested ON P I set being requested OFF Other than when P set being requested ON P I set being requested Main side P set request Sub side P set request OFF Other than when P set being requested ON P I set being requested Sub program 2 P I set request D a a a a a a oy a P E BR pS e oo N ron a BR N N a a 11 53 set completion completion set completion completion STOP status OFF STOP not in effect e Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STOP Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed the number of times preset by parameter after STRA instruction is executed Reset when STRAR instruction is executed e Turning on off SM803 can execute STRA STRAR instruction SM803 is forcibly turned on off by a peripheral d
90. 8 3 86 80 0 3 3 15 0 01 Ew vo 5H DE a0 a S 417 0 3 16 43 0 01 REZI 0 3 16 43 0 01 439 17 30 Unit mm inch App 13 App 13 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 3 Comparison Between Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU The comparison between the Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU is given below APPENDIX 3 1 Function comparison Function Version and Serial Number of High Performance model QCPU Process Function Version A Function Version B CPU 02091 02092 03051 04012 Added Function or earlier or later or later or later Automatic write to standard ROM O x o o o o Enforced ON OFF for external I O pesons osmo L ee te Remote Remote password seting setting a Ie ERES remote I O network ecrUp module QI60 compHipily ea ae a manas off pe pe e systern mmen r o e f e e er el CPU system High speed interrupt speed interrupt Compatibility with index modification for module designation of dedicated instruction Selection of refresh item for COM ENESES eee al Process control instructions control instructions Online module change SS ae a A EJEJETENEJEN x x x x x system Available x N A App 14 App 14 APPENDICES MELSEC Q MEMO App 15 App 15 INDEX Ind A Allowable momentary power failure period 4 3 B Base unit Extension ccccccceeeesssssteeeeeeeees 2 3 6 5
91. 9 Uf i ua uy SD1230 46 4 ae 3 SD1231 62 6 Ea oe The bit corresponding to the station number with the error becomes 1 Example When local station 3 and remote I O station 14 have an error bits 2 and 13 of SD1228 become 1 and when SD1228 is monitored its value is 8196 20041 11 86 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Conversion Special Special Register after Register for Conversion Modification SD1240 SD1241 SD1242 Local station and remote I O station loop error Number of times communications errors detected Local station link type Station number D1243 station information for host Meaning Stores conditions or up to numbers 1to8 Stores conditions or up to numbers 9 to 16 Stores conditions or up to numbers 17 to 24 Stores conditions or up to numbers 25 to 32 Stores conditions or up to numbers 33 to 40 Stores conditions or up to numbers 41 to 48 Stores conditions or up to numbers 49 to 56 Stores conditions or up to numbers 57 to 64 Stores cumulative total of receive errors Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores station number 0 to 64 Corresponding Detail etails CPU Stores the local or remote station number at which a forward
92. Changing the module loading positions Load large current consumption modules on the main base unit Load small current consumption modules on the extension base unit 2 Using short extension cables The shorter the extension cable is the smaller the resistance and voltage drops are Use the shortest possible extension cables 5 1 3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply Be sure of the following terms when connecting the Process CPU system to the uninterruptive power supply abbreviated as UPS hereafter Use a UPS which employs the constant inverter power supply method with 5 or less voltage fluctuation Do not use a UPS with the constant commercial power supply method 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 2 Names of Parts and Settings The names of the parts of each power supply module are described below 1 Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P Q64P HELSEC OsP AL BOWER 5 lt ee NI E 24G INPUT 100 120VAC 50 60Hz 105VA OUTPUT 5VDC 6A ER oo E 24VDC 0 5A H H TT a G A cr co nolo Ko O INPUT N 100 120VAC Q A 1 INPUT 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 105VA OUTPUT 5VDC 3A 24VDC 0 6A HH 24VDC 0 5A ta O4 INPUT N 100 240VAC Ql a O MH 3 IN
93. DC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in the circuit exceeds the specified value The LED of the power supply module is unlit or lit dimly upon a voltage drop If this device is activated switch the input power supply off and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short Then a few minutes later switch it on to restart the system The initial start for the system takes place when the current value becomes normal Overvoltage protection The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5 VDC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5 5 to 6 5 VDC is applied to the circuit When this device is activated the power supply module LED is switched OFF If this happens switch the input power OFF then a few minutes later ON This causes the initial start for the system to take place The power supply module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains OFF Permissible instantaneous power failure time 1 For AC input power supply e An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 20ms will cause AC down to be detected but operation will continue e An instantaneous power failure lasting more than 20ms may cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending on the power supply load Furthermore by using the same AC power supply for the AC input module and the power supply module it is possible to prevent the sensor to which the AC input module is connected from t
94. DING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 7 Note the following points when mounting a DIN rail Mounting a DIN rail needs special adaptors optional which are to be user prepared a Applicable adaptor types For Q38B Q312B Q68B Q612B Q6DIN1 For Q35B Q65B Q6DIN2 For Q33B Q52B Q55B Q63B Q6DIN3 b Adaptor installation method The way to install the adaptors for mounting a DIN rail to the base unit is given below Base unit rear O Es j o i OO Seats Place the hook of the adaptor Push the top of the adaptor small in the lower hole small far enough until it clicks Insert the adaptor large into the grooves Push the bottom of the adaptor large far of the base unit from below enough until it clicks c Applicable DIN rail types JIS C 2812 TH35 7 5Fe TH35 7 5Al TH35 15Fe d DIN rail mounting screw intervals When using a TH35 7 5Fe or TH35 7 5Al DIN rail rail mounting screws should be tightened at a pitch of 200 mm 7 88 inch or less in order to ensure that the rail has sufficient strength DIN rail DIN rail mounting screw b 35mm 1 38 inch _ P 200mm 7 88 inch or less 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 3 2 Instructions for mounting the base unit When mounting the PLC to an enclosure or the like fully consider its operability maintainability and environmental resistance 1 Module mounting position For enha
95. Depends on whether or not a local station has detected an ON Error detection error in another station OFF No errors Depends on whether or not a local or a remote I O station ON Error detection has detected any link parameter error in the master station station error Local station SM1238 SM1240 loopback test remote I O OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward and reverse station forward or ON Abnormal loop lines of a local or a remote I O station reverse loop error SM1241 Forward oop ling OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line error ON Abnormal Reverse loop line OFF Normal QnA SM1242 P Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line error ON Abnormal Loopback OFF Loopback not being Depends on whether or not loopback is occurring at the oie implementation conducted local station R ON Loopback implementation i M9246 SM1246 Data not received OFF Reception Depends on whether or not data has been received from ON No reception the master station f OFF Reception Depends on whether or not a tier three station has pat allen Lael Data nat received ON No reception received data from its master station in a three tier system M9250 SM1250 Parameters not OFF Reception Depends on whether or not link parameters have been received ON No reception received from the master station 3 OFF Normal Performs control depending on whether the host station M9251 1 SM1291
96. E dink roay ON _ Abnormal has suspended data link or not OFF Not being executed M9252 SM1252 Loop test status ON Forward or reverse loop test execution underway Master station ORFES RUN OTE BUN Depends on whether or not the master station is in STOP pliers operation status status or PAUSE mode pi ON STOP or PAUSE status OFF Online ON Offline station to Depends on whether the local station is online or offline or Link statis stationtest or self is in station to station test or self loopback test mode Relay M9233 M9235 M9236 M9241 M9242 M9243 Depends on whether or not the local station is executing a forward or a reverse loop test Local station eee ie ieee Depends on whether or not a local station other than the piney station operation status host is in STOP or PAUSE mode status p ON STOP or PAUSE status Local station SM1255 other than host station error OFF Normal Depends on whether or not a local station other than the ON Abnormal host is in error 10 Process control instructions A 3 Set by ACPU Applicable OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not to hold the output value when a SM41500 Hold mode ON Hold range over occurs for the S IN instruction range check E New OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not the output value is held when a SMIS iMod mods ON Hold range over occurs for the S OUT instruction range check 3 New 11 57 11 57 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q
97. E A EEE EE AEA E OE S A 18 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations cecccscecccecceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeceeseaesaesaeceeeeaesaesaeseeseaeeaeeaeseeeeateaes A 19 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 5 MA EO ALU OS E xs exe et taints os fee ene eh eva ok ve ene et dan od ee a ok cae eh den tad el dae ena ot in A i aeet fluid et ia eldva ay ele 1 2 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 1to2 5 2 1 System Configuratio N s in ipinin Geile idee a da aaa ana a iiaae 2 1 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration cccceccecesseseeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeaesaeceeseeeeaesaeseeeaesaesaeseeseaeeaseeseaeeaees 2 4 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Version ccccecceceseeeeeceeeeseeeeceeeeeeeaeeaesaeeeeeeaesaeeaeeeeeeas 2 5 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 2 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE 4 1to4 17 4 1 Performance Specification vei ied We Wee ie SE ee ee ee 4 1 4 2 Part Names and Settings cecccsceccecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeecaecaeseeeeaesaeseeseeesaeeaesaeseaesaesaeseseaesaesaeseesaesaeseeseaeeaees 4 4 4 3 Switch Operation After Writing in Program e ceecceccecceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeseeeeaeeaeseeeeaesaesaeseeseaeeesseaeeaees 4 7 44 atch Clear Operation eaa aeaea laa aves aaa aaa Taa a aaa a Kaaa aa a Taaa Eaa Aaaa aE aaa aaa 4 8 4 5 Executing Automatic Write to Standard ROM ccccecceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaneeseaeenees 4 8 4 6 Online Module Change aasre iere iia aa
98. ERROR File name Parameter number Flicker STOP _ RUN 3001 3002 PARAMETER ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Flicker wnen an END instruction is 3003 At power ON Reset PARAMETER ERROR File name Parameter number Flicker STOP _ gt RUN At power ON Reset 3004 STOP RUN PARAMETER ERROR File name Parameter number Flicker 3010 3012 At power ON Reset STOP RUN PARAMETER ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Flicker 3013 3014 x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 11 27 11 27 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres rror Goda Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding SDO x CPU Program memory capacity was exceeded by performing boot operation or automatic write to standard ROM The file designated at the parameter PLC RAS settings fault history area has not been created The file designated by the sequence program cannot be found e sequence program designated a file that cannot be designated Read the error individual 2411 h i fi i by the sequence program comment file etc 2412 The SFC program file is one that cannot be designated by the sequence program No data has been written to the file designated by the sequence 2413 program 2500 There is
99. G 500VAC across 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft primary and 5VDC Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs and 10MQ or more by Insulation resistance LG FG across outputs and FG LG 10MQ or more by insulation insulation resistance resistance tester tester By noise simulator of e By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 u s noise width and 25 500Vp p noise voltage Noise immunity to 60Hz noise frequency 1 us noise width and e Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Operation indication LED indication lit at 5VDC output Built in Unchangeable by user ERR contact contact switched off opened normally closed contact at an error stop of CPU module for CPU module operating status output Rated switching 24VDC 0 5A voltage current 5VDC 1mA OFF to ON 10ms max ON to OFF 12ms max Life Mechanical More than 2 million times Electrical More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage current Surge suppressor N No CN Applicable crimping terminal external dimensions DO 90mm BESinch o 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Power Supply Module Specifications Continued Performance Specifications l Item Q64P Base loading position Power supply module loading slot Applicable base unit Q30B Q60B 10 15 85V to 132VAC 170 to 264VAC Within 5 See section 5 1 3 Rated output current CU Pe Overcurrent 9 9A or more protectio
100. IX 1 1 Error code overall explanation ceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaes App 1 APPENDIX 1 2 Description of the errors of the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH eeeeeeeeesteeteeeteees App 2 APPENDIX 2 External Dimensions ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeceaeeseaeeseacessaaesseaeeecaeeseeeseeneeeeeeseaees App 8 APPENDIX Z TOPU MOGUNe suorana aa a aa A N E AA N N App 8 APPENDIX 2 2 Power supply module c ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeeeaaesseaeeecaeeteeeseaeees App 9 APPENDIX 2 3 Main base unit ccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeecaeeeeaeeeeeaeceeaeeseaeeseaeeseaaeseeaeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeees App 10 APPENDIX 2 4 Extension pase Unit a e a a ea a aa a ae aea aaa S a N A E aa aae aAa aaa App 12 APPENDIX 3 Comparison Between Process CPU and High Performance model QCPU 0005 App 14 APPENDIX 3 1 Function comparison ccc cccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeseaeeeeneeseaeeseaeeeeaaeesaeeesaeeseaeeseaeees App 14 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 A 9 A 9 Related mantal reari esri anaa An AAS EAE AA E Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features 1 2 Programs 1 3 Convenient Programming Devices and Instructions 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 1 System Configuration 2 2 Precaution on System configuration 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Versi
101. If the designated value is out of the range above it is assumed to no setting processing MELSEC Q QCPU Remote 11 68 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Set by Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation When set ACPU No of modules Indicates the number of modules installed on Ethernet installed V O No Ethernet I O No of the 1st module installed ri e Ethernet group No of the 1st module installed S Initial N k e Ethernet network No of the 1st module installed ion ea e Ethernet station No of the 1st module installed Empty The Ethernet IP address of the 1st module is stored in buffer oo Ethernet information n The Ethernet error code of the 1st module is read with the ERRORRD instruction EF n Information from 2nd module Configuration is identical to that for the first module Nn Information from 3rd module e Configuration is identical to that for the first module S Initial NIN Information from 4th module No of modul z 0 of modules Indicates the number of modules installed on Ethernet installed VO No e Ethernet I O No of the 1st module installed Network Configuration is identical to that for the first module EEE n Ethernet network No of the 1st module installed No ri Ethernet group No of the 1st module installed el e Ethernet station N
102. LC system and the specification standards of the extension base unit 6 1 Base Unit Specification Table 1 Main base unit specifications Number of I O modules i 3 5 installed Possibility of extension Extendable Applicable module Q series modules VDE imternalcurrent 0 105A 0 110A 0 114A 0 121A consumption Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4 5 hole for M4 screw 98mm 3 86inch 189mm 7 44inch 245mm 9 65inch 328mm 12 92inch 439mm 17 30inch 44 1mm 1 74inch 0 21kg 0 25 kg 0 35 kg 0 45 kg ttachment Mounting screw M4 x 14 4 pieces DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately es Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 Adapter type 2 Extension base unit specification Type not requiring power supply module aa ei ie Number of I O modules 2 5 installed Possibility of extension Extendable Applicable module 5 VDC internal current 0 080A 0 100A consumption 106mm 4 17inch 189mm 7 43inch D 44 1mm 1 74inch 0 14kg DIN rail mounting DIN 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 3 Extension base unit specifications Type Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B Item Number ot VO 3 5 12 modules installed Possibility of e ETN Applicable module module Q series modules 5 VDC internal current 0 105A 0 110A 0 114A 0 121A consumption Extendable Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4 5 hole for M4 screw 98mm 3 86inch Ea 189mm 7 44inch 245mm 9 65inch 328mm 12 92inch 439mm 17 30inch
103. LED of the power supply module lit Proceed to Section 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering Is ERR LED on flickering RUN LED is on 1 PLC part connection fault 2 By excessive noise Reset the CPU module RESET L CLR switch RUN LED is off For the case of 1 For the Set the CPU module s RUN STOP case of 2 switch to STOP and write END to address 0 with the GX Please consult your local Mitsubishi Developer service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Set the RUN STOP switch to RUN and enter to the monitor mode with the GX Developer to be operated RUN LED does not turn on RUN LED is on Considered to be a sequence program error Check the program and modify the program error location Connect a surge protector circuit such as CR to the noise source Can RUN LED be turned on Completion 11 6 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 6 When the RUN LED is flickering If the RUN LED flickers follow the steps below The Process CPU flickers the RUN LED when the RUN STOP switch is set from STOP to RUN after the programs or parameters are written in the CPU module during the stoppage Though this is not the trouble with the CPU module the operation of the CPU module is stopped To bring the CPU mo
104. M memory SRAM card only Switch for fixing the battery holder to the memory card main module 2 Battery holder Battery holder fixing Locked at LOCK position write protect switch side switch LOCK Locked RELEASE Unlocked SRAM card only Used to set write inhibit in the memory At the time of shipping it is set at OFF Write protect switch SRAM card and Flash card only ON Data write inhibited OFF Data write enabled The battery holder fixing switch is returned automatically from RELEASE to LOCK when the battery holder is disconnected 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 5 Memory Card Loading Unloading Procedures 1 To install the memory card Install the memory card into the CPU module while paying attention to the orientation of the memory card Insert the memory card securely into the connector until the height of the memory card reaches that of the memory card EJECT button Memory card EJECT button CPU Memory card module Insert it in this Precautions direction on this side 2 To remove the memory card To remove the memory card from the CPU module press the memory card EJECT button to push out the card Memory card EJECT button lt q Push Memory card CPU module Remove the card in this direction gt 3 To extract the memory card while the power is turned on Before removing the memory card make sure that the special relays SM604 SM605 are
105. M800 ON Ready Switches ON when the trace preparation is completed New OFF Suspend e Trace is started when this relay switches ON SM801 Trace start ON Siar e Trace is suspended when this relay switches OFF U M9047 i All related special Ms switches OFF smao2 eee execution OFF Suspend Switches ON during execution of trace S Status M9046 in progress ON Start change Trace is triggered when this relay switches from OFF to ony PER eat ON Identical to TRACE instruction execution status 5 M9044 OFF Not after trigger aa E S Status SM804 After trace trigger ON After trigger Switches ON after trace is triggered change SM805 Trace completed OE Nor completed Switches ON at completion of trace S Staris ON End change Step trace OFF Not ready i s SM820 preparation ON Ready Goes ON after program trace registration at ready Step trace starts OFF Suspend e When this goes ON step trace is started S P ON Start e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF Step trace OFF Suspend Goes ON when step trace execution is underway Status ON Start Goes OFF at completion or suspension change foc N N D X lt o Q Cc underway Goes ON if even 1 block within the step trace being executed is triggered Goes OFF when step trace is commenced After Step trace OFF Is not after all triggers 7Goes ON ifall blocks within the step tr ce being S Status executed are trigge
106. MELSEC Q 3 Disconnection of extension cable When unplugging the extension cable hold and pull the connector part of the extension cable after making sure that the fixing screws have been removed completely 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 2 2 MELSEC Q 9 6 Wiring 9 6 1 The precautions on the wiring D DANGER Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or placing wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work be sure that the module s terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock CAUTION Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation When wiring in the PLC be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product s rated voltage and the terminal layout Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools or correctly soldered Imperfect connections could result in short circuit fires or erroneous operation Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it could result in short circuits fire
107. MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7 1to7 6 7 1 Memory Card Specifications cccccscceeeceseeeeceeceeeeaecaecaeeaecaecaeeeaeeaeseeceeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseaeeaesaeseeseaeeaees 7 1 7 2 Battery Specifications For CPU Module and SRAM Cat d ccscescseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeaesaeseeseaeeaees 7 2 7 3 Handling the Memory Card ccccecceceeseeseceeceeeeseeeecaeeseeesesaecaeeeeeeaesaeseeeaeseaesaeseeseaeeaesaesaeseaseeseaeseeseaeeaees 7 3 7 4 The Names of The Parts of The Memory Card csccecceceeseeseeeeceeeeeeeaeseeseeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaesaeseseaesaeeaeseeeeaes 7 4 7 5 Memory Card Loading Unloading Procedures cccceceseeeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeesaeeaeseeeeaesaesaeseeteaesaeeeeseaeeaaes 7 5 7 6 Installation of Battery For CPU Module and Memory Card c cecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeaees 7 6 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 1108 8 8 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 00 eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseesesaeeeseeeiesaeeesaeeateee 8 1 8 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive ccccceceeccecceeceeeeceeceeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeeeeeeneas 8 1 8 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC Dir Ctive ccccceccecesseceeceeceeeeseceeceeeeaesaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeeaeeaeeas 8 2 B21 39 Gables a a hcigevacesed a bo tics seaatg abies E sua ang agessbeaeien ate a a E nase 8 3 8 1 4 Powersupply Module arrosar on cere ee hadnt eee ee aaa ere et ea eee 8 5 B15 QUICK cathe
108. NER Rated current sa 6a 3A O Rated voltage 250 V 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive The Low Voltage Directive requires each device that operates with the power supply ranging from 50 to 1000VAC and 75 to 1500VDC to satisfy the safety requirements In Sections 8 2 1 to 8 2 6 cautions on installation and wiring of the MELSEC Q series PLC to conform to the Low Voltage Directive are described We have put the maximum effort to develop this material based on the requirements and standards of the regulation that we have collected However compatibility of the devices which are fabricated according to the contents of this manual to the above regulation is not guaranteed Each manufacturer who fabricates such device should make the final judgement about the application method of the Low Voltage Directive and the product compatibility 8 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC Q series PLC The standard applied for MELSEC Q series PLC is EN61010 1 safety of devices used in measurement rooms control rooms or laboratories The MELSEC Q series PLC modules which operate at the rated voltage of 50VAC 75VDC or above are also developed to conform to the above standard The modules which operate at the rated voltage of less than 50VAC 75VDC are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 8 2 2 MELSEC Q series PLC selection 1 Power supply module There are dangerous vol
109. O is stored here File name Drive name Example Number Meaning ABCDEFGH UK SD16 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD17 pale 41H A SD18 File name 44H D 43H C SD19 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD20 48H H 47H G D21 Extension 2EH 49H I 2EH SD22 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD23 SD24 Vacant SD25 SD26 Time value actually measured Number Meaning SD16 Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us SD17 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 Vacant SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 Program error location Number Meaning SD16 SD17 File name E SD18 ASCII code 8 characters E rror Error individual SD19 ennenlon individual D20 Extension 2EH S Error New O Rem info information sD21 ASCII code 3 characters SD22 Pattern 4 SD23 Block No SD24 Step No transition No SD25 Sequence step No L SD26 Sequence step No H x4 Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number 0 0 to 0 0 __SFc block designation present Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 Parameter number A
110. OFF e When SM604 is ON the memory card cannot be removed since the CPU module is using the memory card e When SM605 is ON turn it OFF When SM604 and SM605 are OFF remove the memory card in the following procedure 1 Turn ON the special relay SM609 using the sequence program or by the device test of GX Developer etc 2 By monitoring GX Developer etc check that the special relays SM600 is turned OFF 3 Extract the memory card SM600 Memory card usable flag The system is turned on when memory card is ready for use by user SM604 memory card use flag The system is turned on when the CPU module uses a memory card SM605 memory card detach inhibit flag This is turned on by the user to disable the memory card from being detached 4 To install the memory card while the power is turned ON 1 Install the memory card 2 By monitoring GX Developer etc check that the special relays SM600 is turned ON POINTS Install and remove the memory card while the power is turned on paying attention to the following 1 If the procedures specified above are not followed the data stored in the memory card may be destroyed When the CPU module operation at the time of occurrence of a parameter error is set to STOP the CPU module operation is stopped by the occurrence of ICM OPE ERROR 2 When the memory card is installed its mount processing is performed again As a result the scanning time is increased by
111. PU of function version A for the High Performance model QCPU of function version B ei a a CPUeveem configurator verson Awas 2 An intelligent function module CPU module or the base unit is P y 9 i experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi 1413 representative An intelligent function module the CPU module or the base unit is experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative An error is detected on the system bus e Wait length time out arbitration time out Rem loaded in a multiple CPU system configuration experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative An intelligent function module the CPU module or the base unit is An error is detected on the system bus experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi Rem representative 1415 Fault of the main or extension base unit was detected An intelligent function module CPU module or the base unit is ee O 1 Change the High Performance model QCPU of function version Fault of the loaded module was detected A for the High Performance model QCPU of function version B The High Performance model QCPU of function version A was 2 An intelligent function module CPU module or the base unit is experiencing problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi 1416 System bus fault was detected at power on or reset representative A momentary power supply interruption has occurred O 1500 The power supply went off Check th
112. PUT 200 240VAC 50 60Hz 105VA OUTPUT 5VDC 6A ERR r u 24VDC 0 5A HH ra D4 wH INPUT DDD 200 240VAC INPUT 24VDC MAX 45W OUTPUT 5VDC 6A ERR EH L 24VDC 0 5A 4 Oy MELSEC Q S ra O 2 INPUT 24VDC 2a aL Q63P MELSEC 4P INPUT 100 120 200 240VAC ourpursvocasa A ERR l4 2 2avoc o sa HH aH amp t 3 wH 4 INPUT N 1 4 100 T20 200 240VAC oP 9 gt 6 Q64P 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Application POWER LED 5VDC power indicator LED 1 Turned ON when the whole system operates normally 2 Turned OFF opened when a stop error occurs in the CPU module 2 ERR terminals 3 In a multiple CPU system configuration turned OFF when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules Normally off when loaded in an extension base unit FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board gt Niger Grounding for the power supply filter The potential of Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q64P and Q62P terminal is 1 2 of the input voltage 24V 24G terminals Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module using external wiring
113. Process CPU MITSUBISHI Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspecti ay ITG Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEG Q aes SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using When using Mitsubishi equipment thoroughly read this manual and the associated manuals introduced in this manual Also pay careful attention to safety and handle the module properly These SAFETY PRECAUTIONS classify the safety precautions into two categories DANGER and CAUTION 7 s 1 D DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage N A Depending on circumstances procedures indicated by CAUTION may also be linked to serious results In any case it is important to follow the directions for usage Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS lt gt DANGER Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the PLC module Otherwise trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation 1 Outside the PLC construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits such as emer
114. Q 7 3 Handling the Memory Card 1 Formatting of memory card Any SRAM or ATA card used on the Process CPU must have been formatted Since the SRAM or ATA card purchased is not yet formatted format it using GX Developer before use The Flash card need not be formatted For the formatting procedure see the Operating Manual of the GX Developer 2 Installation of SRAM card battery A power interrupt hold on battery is furnished with the SRAM card you purchased Before using the SRAM card install the battery POINTS Even if the battery is installed on the CPU module if a battery is not installed on the SRAM card the memory of the SRAM card will not be backed up Ensure to install the battery on the SRAM card Also if the battery is installed on the SRAM card but the CPU module has no battery the program memory standard RAM and latch devices of the CPU module are not backed up Similarly ensure to install the battery on the CPU module 3 Kind of file which can be stored on memory card Please refer to the Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals of section 6 1 for the kind of the file which can be stored on each memory card 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 4 The Names of The Parts of The Memory Card The names of the parts of the memory card are described below Descriptions Connector section connected to the CPU module Used to set the lithium battery for data backup of the SRA
115. RROR Unit module No Program error location Flicker On Flicker On a When instruction is executed 2tt6 lt EE ait Ea 9104 SP UNIT LAY ERR Flicker Stop _ At power ON At reset jas 2126 SP UNIT LAY ERR Unit module No tE At power ON At reset 2150 SP UNIT VER ERR Unit module No EACE At power ON At reset 2210 BOOT ERROR ET Flicker Stop _ At power ON At reset 2300 Stop ar EAN OPE ERROR Drive Name OfffOn Flicker On Continue W hen memory card is inserted or 2301 x2 2400 FILE SET ERROR Parameter number At power ON At reset 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 11 25 11 25 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres Error Coge Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding SDO x CPU Pa A Read the individual information of the error check the program Station not loaded was specified using the instruction whose target was the CPU share memory cortesponding that value program error location and make 2110 MT t a 1 The location designated by the FROM TO instruction set is nota 1 Read error individual information then check and edit the intelligent function module FROM TO instruction set that corresponds to the numerical 2 The intelligent function module Netwo
116. Start stop SFC program SFC program start status Presence absenc e of continuous transition for entire block Continuous transition prevention flag Output mode at block stop SM255 SM267 SM322 SM323 SM324 SM325 11 45 TROUBLESHOOTING OFF Operative network ON Standby network ON Does not read ON Does not write OFF Operative network ON Standby network ON Does not read ON Does not write OFF Operative network ON Standby network OFF Reads ON Does not read OFF Writes ON Does not write OFF Operative network ON Standby network ON Does not read ON Does not write OFF Normal ON Error OFF SFC program absent ON SFC program present OFF SFC program stop ON SFC program start OFF Initial start ON Restart OFF Continuous transition not effective ON Continuous transition effective OFF When transition is executed ON When no transition OFF OFF ON Preserves Special Relay List Continued Explanation Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed e For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module For refresh from CPU to link B W etc whether to write to the link module Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed For refresh from link to CPU B W etc
117. Toni Togi Togi 308 0 3 12 14 0 01 328 12 92 ri 2 98 3 86 3 15 0 01 T 7 5 0 30 44 1 1 74 Unit mm inch App 10 App 10 APPENDICES E 4 Main Base Unit Q312B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 98 3 86 3 15 0 01 m 419 0 3 16 51 0 01 439 17 30 i 75 a 0 30 44 1 1 74 0 61 A Unit mm inch App 11 App 11 APPENDICES APPENDIX 2 4 Extension base unit 1 Extension Base Unit Q52B re 0 0 75 won u 155 83 5 0 3 07D 8 29 0 01 0 61 106 4 17 4 mounting screws M4x 14 U Al AR I I Why out woot roni o 98 3 86 81520 01 gt 2 Extension Base Unit Q55B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 i ERDU 75 0 30 Ia 444 2 15 5 167 0 3 i 6 57 0 01 189 7 44 98 3 86 3 15 0 01 LS T 3 Extension Base Unit Q63B 4 mounting screws M4 x 14
118. U second Number dkSsunts in Following programmable controller CPU module RUN 1 is D412 added each second counter 1 second units e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 S 2 SD414 Pa 2n second clock e Stores value n of 2n second clock Default is 30 units Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 setting B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2B1 BO 0 to 0 Not used L Instruction reception status of channel 1 Instruction reception status of channel 2 Instruction reception status of channel 3 SD380 Instruction reception L Instruction reception status of channel 4 ____________ Instruction reception status of channel 5 Status of 1st module _____________Instruction reception status of channel 6 Ethernet _________________ Instruction reception status of channel 7 instruction Instruction reception status of channel 8 recentior ON Received Channel is used S Initial New P OFF Not received Channel is not used status instruc i nstruction reception yi sk ehh y A SD381 P Configuration is identical to that for the first module status of 2nd module Instruction reception j PAESE i SD382 p Configuration is identical to that for the first module QnA status of 3rd module Instruction reception Bites F A SD383 P Configuration is identical to that for the first module status of 4th module Stores the internal system software version in ASCII code SD392 S Initial D9060 SD395 D415 2nms clock Sameelockeunits Stores v
119. U module Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Power supply Y80 to Y8F i module for fail safe purpose 1 1 The output module for fail safe purpose should be loaded in the last slot of the system Y80 to Y8F in the above system lt Fail safe circuit example gt ON delay timer Internal program Y80 O Or SM412 OFF delay timer Ys0 T2 1s External load MC Y81 0 7 24V O 0 5s 0 5s E V WO avoe f CPU module Output module x2 Ti T2 2 Y80 repeats turning ON and then OFF at 0 5s intervals Use a no contact output module transistor in the example shown above 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 2 Calculating Heat Generation by PLC The ambient temperature inside the board storing the PLC must be suppressed to a PLC usable ambient temperature of 55 C For the design of radiation from the storing board it is necessary to know the average power consumption heating value of the devices and instruments stored in the board Here the method of obtaining the average power consumption of the PLC system is described From the power consumption calculate a rise in ambient temperature inside the board How to calculate average power consumption The power consuming parts of the PLC are roughly classified into six blocks as shown below 1 Power consumption of power supply module The power conversion efficiency of the powe
120. VO verification ee error display SM1198 roe Data recovery of SM1199 online sampling Ve trace status latch Relay M9104 M9108 M9109 M9110 M9114 M9196 M9197 M9198 M9199 11 55 MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Meaning OFF When transition is completed ON When no transition OFF Watchdog timer reset ON Watchdog timer reset start Trace started Trace completed Trace not being executed Trace execution under way Trace disable suspend Trace enable Coil output OFF Coil output ON VO numbers displayed OFF Data recovery disabled ON Data recovery enabled Details e Set when consecutive transfer is not executed with consecutive transfer enabled Reset when transfer of one step is completed Consecutive transfer of a step can be prevented by writing an AND condition to corresponding M9104 Turned on when the step transfer monitoring timer is started Turned off when the monitoring timer is reset Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is completed Reset when sampling trace is started Set when sampling trace is being executed Reset when sampling trace is completed or suspended Selects sampling trace execution enable disable ON Sampling trace execution is enabled OFF Sampling trace execution is disabled If turned off during sampling trace execution trace is suspended Selects the operation output when block stop is
121. a detailed description of the problem 11 10 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Secs MELSEC Q 11 2 12 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn on The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the output load of the output module does not turn on during PLC operation The output load does not turn on Is the operation indicator of output module turned on NO Check output conditions with the monitor mode of the GX Developer YES Is voltage for the power supply load added Is the operation indicator of input module turned on Off Voltage measurement among the modules input and COM terminals OV hat is the voltag among the various output COM terminals of the output module Set the GX Developer in the monitor mode and check that the input signal is OFF Supply voltage Is it reaching the supply voltage value Output module failure y Check the external wiring and external input devices Monitor signal off Replace the output module Check the power supply load wire and recover the power supply Check the load wire and load and recover the power supply Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative y Confirm rush current when the load is at the maximum simultaneous on Change the output relay number and let the load maximum simultaneous on current
122. a program file that uses a device that exceeds the device allocation range designated by the parameter device settings There are multiple program files although none has been set at the parameter program settings The program file is incorrect Alternatively the file contents are not those of a sequence program There are no program files at all Two or more SFC normal programs or control programs have been designated In a multiple CPU system the intelligent function module under control of another station is specified in the interrupt pointer setting of the parameter The parameter settings for timer time limit setting the RUN PAUSE contact the common pointer number the general data processing number of vacant slots or system interrupt settings are outside the range that can be used by the CPU module 2501 2502 2503 2504 3001 When use the following files is selected for the file registers in the PLC file setting parameter the specified file does not exist though the file register capacity has been set 3002 The number of devices set at the parameter device settings exceeds the possible CPU module range The parameter file is incorrect Alternatively the contents of the file are not parameters The parameter set number of CPU modules differs from the actual number in a multiple CPU system Multiple CPU setting or control PLC setting differs from that of the reference station in a multiple CPU system
123. aeaa ah ina deeded dade eet 4 10 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1t05 8 S SPOCIICALI ON m nania a a a a sheet aeeGhes E a aa 5 1 5 1 1 Power supply module specifications s essessessesresuesnssnssnnrnsnnennnnnennsnununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnn 5 1 5 1 2 Selecting the power supply MOCUIC cccecceeeeeeceeeeceeseeeeceeeeeeeaeeaeseeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaesaeeentaneaes 5 3 5 1 3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power Supply ssssssssssssssrssrssrsrrssrsrsrrsnsnsrnsenss 5 4 5 2 Names of Parts and Settings cccecceseeceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeaeceeceeseceeaecaesaeseaesaesaesaeseaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaseaees 5 5 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 1to 6 10 6 1 Base Unit Specification Table sssini aosan aasan aaeain er aaar ia aa apia aiaei 6 1 6 2 Extension Cable Specification Table cccceccecceceeseeeeceeceseeeeeaeceeseeeeaecaeceeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeseseaesaseesenseaees 6 2 6 3 Parts Names or Base Unite nc 25 cient en inti aie einen ai eee 6 3 6 4 Setting the Extension Base Unit cccccceceeseeeeeeeceeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeseeseataeseeseateaees 6 5 A 7 A 7 6 5 WO Number Allocation ccccccccccccccccccceeccccccseeeeseseccecceaaeessseesseeeeuaeeseeeesseeeaaaeeeeeeesseesaueeeseessesessaeeeeeeess 6 6 6 6 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units Q50B cecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeceeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaesaeeeeeeateaes 6 7 7
124. alue n of 2nms clock Default is 30 setting Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 e This counter increases by 1 for each scan of the scan execution S Every type program after RUN of the CPU module END e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 processing Low seeed e This counter increases by 1 for each scan of the low speed S Ever SD430 P Number of counts in execution type program after RUN of the CPU module y S S Number of counts in each scan scan END each scan Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 5 counter processing e Used only for low speed execution type programs x Not counted by the scan in an initial execution type program 11 70 11 70 11 4 Scan information Number Name Execution program No Low speed program No Current scan time Initial scan time Minimum scan time Maximum scan time Current scan time for low speed execution type programs Minimum scan time for low speed execution type programs Maximum scan time for low speed execution type programs END processing time Ee 11 71 TROUBLESHOOTING Meaning Execution type of program being executed File name of low speed execution in progress Current scan time ms unit Current scan time us unit ms unit us unit Minimum scan time ms unit Minimum scan time us unit Maximum scan time ms unit Maximum scan time us unit Current scan time
125. am The TM set value should be the period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 DC voltage Set this value to approximately 0 5 seconds 5 Turn ON the start switch 6 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the program If a voltage relay is used at RA2 no timer TM is required in the program 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 2 System design circuit example when using ERR contact of power supply module POWER TRANSFORMER aos TRANSFORMER Input switched Z n FUSE FUSE when power supply _ CPU oe established gt S52 pany M ei Ym SUPPLY RUN STOP circuit interlocked with SM403 D run monitor relay FUSE XM D Set time for DC power supply to TM i no L be established M10 1 STRAT PROGRAM ie RAT 1 RA T wc Stop SW m T Voltage relay is RA2 O XM recommended OUTPUT MODULE na m Low battery alarm NA Lamp or buzzer o Yn yw Lozacsset OFF at stop error POWER SUPPLY ERR from ERR MODULE J aa ey MC MC Interlock circuits asnecessary Provide external interlock circuits for conflicting operations such as forward rotation and reverse rotation and for parts that could damage the machine or cause accidents if no interlock were used The power ON procedure is as follows For AC DC 1 Switch power ON 2 Set CPU to RUN 3 When DC pow
126. aracters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 23 11 23 11 TR OUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code Gorres SD0 x 1 Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding In the parameter I O allocation settings an Inteli intelligent Pied module was allocated to a location reserved for an I O module or vice versa 2 In the parameter I O allocation settings a module other than CPU or nothing was allocated to a location reserved for a CPU module or vice versa 3 A general purpose switch was set to the module with no general purpose switches 1 Two or more QI60 modules are loaded in a single CPU system 2 Two or more QI60 modules are set to the same control PLC ina multiple CPU system The QI60 is loaded e Five or more MELSECNET H modules are loaded in a whole multiple CPU system Five or more Q series Ethernet interface modules are loaded in a whole multiple CPU system 1 5 or more MELSECNET H modules have been installed 2 5 or more Q series Ethernet interface modules have been installed 3 Identical network numbers or station numbers exist in the MELSECNET 10 network system Slot loaded with the QI60 is set to other than the Inteli intelligent function module or Interrupt interrupt module in the parameter O Make setting again to match the parameter I O assignment with the actual loading status assignment 1 Reset the parameter I
127. ber and correct Check the space remaining in the memory card Read the error individual information at the GX Developer check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Create a file set in parameters and write it to the CPU module information at the GX Developer check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Read the error individual information at the GX Developer check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Check to ensure that the designated file has not been write protected Read the error common information at the GX Developer check to be sure that the parameter device allocation setting and the program file device allocation correspond to the numerical values there file name and correct if necessary Edit the parameter program setting to yes Alternatively delete unneeded programs heck whether the program version is gt QPG and check the ile contents to be sure they are for a sequence program Check program configuration Check parameters and program configuration 1 Specify the first O number of the intelligent function module under control of the host station 2 Delete the interrupt pointer setting of the parameter 1 Read the error detailed information at the GX Developer check the parameter items corresponding
128. by OUT F or SET F the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by or instruction If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be stored in SD62 When one of FO to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or SET F the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by executing RST F or LEDR instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU module front to ON position If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the nest number to be stored in SD62 When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Thereafter each time operation error occurs the contents of SD1010 are renewed 11 78 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification D1011 Step number at Error step which operation error has occurred D9014 D1014 lt I O control mode D9015 SD1015 SD203 Operating status Operating status of 1 0 control mode number Main program ROM Main program RAM Subprogram 1 RAM Subprogram 2 RAM Subprogram 3 RAM Subprogram 1 ROM
129. case of standby stations the module number of the standby station is stored 1 to 4 pais MELSECNET H network number of first module installed er MELSECNE information n Information from 2nd module e Configuration is identical to that for the 2nd module njo Information from 3rd module e Configuration is identical to that for the 3rd module Ce Ke2 Information from 4th module e Configuration is identical to that for the 4th module 11 67 11 67 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Number Name Meanin Explanation ee Sos e Link Error ion SD280 CC Li or detectio error status Number of points ed for X er of points ed for Y er of points SD292 er of points SD293 200 ed for L er of points D294 ed for B er of points SD295 D205 ed for F fooi s0296 Device sido allocation Fer DOIN SD297 Same as a ee parameter a sp298_ contents er of points ed for S f point Ta f point a f point oe f point ee a ete f point ey Time reserved for Time reserved for SD315 communicati communication on processing processing 11 68 Special Register List Continued Set by When Xn0 of the installed CC Link goes ON the bit corresponding to the station switches ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the installed CC Link switch OFF the bit corresponding to the station switches ON Switches ON when the CPU module cannot communicate with the installed
130. cates memory card A model installed B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO a Memory card A models 0 Does not exist 1 SRAM Drive 1 RAM model 0 Does not exist 1 SRAM 2 ATA FLASH 3 Flash ROM Drive 2 ROM model e Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units e Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns In use when ON The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT B8 Parameters QPA B9 CPU fault history QFD Device comments QCD BA SFC trace QTS Device initial value QDI BB Local device QDL File register R QDR Trace QTS Memory card A use conditions Indicates memory card A models installed B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO O0 lt gt 0 A Drive 3 RAM model 0 Does not exist 1 SRAM Memory card B models 0 Does not exist 1 SRAM 2 EPROM 3 Flash ROM Drive 4 is fixed to 3 because it has built in Flash ROM Drive 4 ROM model Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units The conditions for usage for drive 3 4 are stored as bit patterns In use when ON e The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Parameters QPA Device comments QCD Device initial value QDI File R QDR Trace QTS Not used
131. chdog timer is for step transition X Corresponds to SD94 M9112 Enabled ont ON Started T ds to SD95 commenced M9113 when SFC y watchdog timer orresponds to e Resets watchdog timer when it started Corresponds to SD96 goes OFF M9114 program exists Corresponds to SD97 Corresponds to SD98 Corresponds to SD99 11 43 11 43 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 2 System information LED off i e When this relay goes from OFF to ON the LEDs 2MENS OER STON LED off corresponding to the individual bits at SD202 go off SM203 STOP contact STOP status Goes ON at STOP status poh M9042 S Status SM204 PAUSE contact PAUSE status Goes ON at PAUSE status change M9041 SM205 STERN STEP RUN status Goes ON at STEP RUN status S Status M9054 contact change PAUSE enable OFF PAUSE disabled PAUSE status is entered if this relay is ON when the U M9040 coil ON PAUSE enabled remote PAUSE contact goes ON OFF No error ON when error is generated in clock data SD210 to SMAI peiaeraecanccliar D213 value and OFF if no error is detected S Req esi Ares Clock data read OFF Ignored When this relay is ON clock data is read to SD210 to u M9028 request ON Read request SD213 as BCD values OFF Online module change S During Online module is not in progress Tums on during online module change online change flag ON Online module change in 9 ge module progress change S When online module Flag that turns OFF Onli
132. ches SW2 and SW3 of the CPU module to ON Power on the PLC Is the BOOT LED turned on CPU module hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion of automatic write from memory card to standard ROM Perform boot operation from standard ROM 11 9 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 11 Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned on 11 10 MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the output module LED does not turn on during PLC operation Output module LED not turned on NO Flickering Is the MODE LED on Refer to Section 11 2 3 Is the LED on when it is monitored on GX Developer NO Reexamine the program Check the input output number on the GX Developer system monitor Does the output number match NO Change the output number Is the LED turned on when another output module is forcibly turned on NO Is the LED turned CPU base unit extension cable On when the output module is hardware fault changed for another output module Please consult your local Mitsubishi which is then forcibly service center or representative turned on explaining a detailed description of the problem Output module hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining
133. cribed on the next page 10 4 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 3 1 Battery life 1 CPU module battery Q6BAT life a The CPU module battery life is given below Energization Battery life CPU Module i i T Time Ratio Guaranteed value Value in actual use Aer SNE PIS energized ype x1 MIN TYP Guaranteed time after alarm occurrence 1260hr 4228hr 48hr 1800hr 6040hr 48hr PAT 2520hr 8456hr 4200hr 14093hr 100 1 The energization time ratio denotes the ratio of power on time in a day 24 hours When power is on for 12 hours and off for 12 hours the energization time ratio is 50 b The Q6BAT life is 10 years when it is used without connecting to the CPU module 2 SRAM card battery life The SRAM card battery life is indicated below Energization Battery life SRAM card Time Ratio Guaranteed value Value in actual use Atter SMSIS energized Guaranteed time after 1 MIN TYP alarm occurrence Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 1MBS Manufacturing control number OOB xej 100 S Oyears 50yeas 5or GEN NGS 690hr 6336hr Manufacturing control number ODA 100 11784hr 13872hr 8hr x2 x1 The energization time ratio denotes the ratio of power on time in a day 24 hours When power is on for 12 hours and off for 12 hours the energization time ratio is 50 x2 The manufacturing control number is given on the SRAM card rear label see below BSE kook CAUTION 11 Manufactur
134. ction ON AC DC DOWN Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less detected than 10ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Seema ON when operation error is generated stern weon Operation Errors e Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations S Error M9011 ON Operation error restored Comes ON even if there is only one output module with a Blown fuse OFF Normal blown fuse and remains ON even after return to normal S Error M9000 detection ON Module with blown fuse Blown fuse status is checked even for remote O station output modules Comes ON if there is a discrepancy between the actual VO module OFF Normal VO modules and the registered information when the verification error JON Error poweri turned S a er Emon Mogo O module verification is also conducted for remote I O station modules S Annunciator ORE Not detected Goes ON if even one annunciator F goes ON Instruction M9009 detection ON Detected execution Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instruction S OFF Not detected REN F CHK detection ON Detected Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is Instruction New a restored execution Corresponds to SD90 M9108 Corresponds to SD91 M9109 Startup of Corresponds to SD92 M9110 watchdog timer OER Net started f Corresponds to SD93 Goes ON b ues measurement 9 f M9111 a watchdog timer reset step transition wat
135. ction of the intelligent function module WS I5V x 5 l24v x 24 l100v x 100 W The total of the power consumption values calculated for each block becomes the power consumption of the overall sequencer system W Wew W5v W24V WOUT WIN Ws W From this overall power consumption W calculate the heating value and a rise in ambient temperature inside the board The outline of the calculation formula for a rise in ambient temperature inside the board is shown below W OJ T W Power consumption of overall sequencer system value obtained above A Surface area inside the board U When the ambient temperature inside the board is uniformed by a fan 6 When air inside the board is not circulated ccceeseeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeees 4 When a rise in ambient temperature inside the board exceeds the specified limit it is recommended that you install a heat exchanger in the board to lower the ambient temperature inside the board If a normal ventilating fan is used dust will be sucked into the PLC together with the external air and it may affect the performance of the PLC 7 Example of calculation of average power consumption a System configuration Q35B Q61P A1 Q25PHCPU Qx40 QX40 QY10 QJ71LP21 25 Vacant b 5 VDC current consumption of each module Q25PHCPU 0 64 A QX40 0 05 A QY10 0 43 A QJ71LP21 25 0 55 A Q35B 0 074 A c Power consumption of power s
136. ction ponding CPU There was no response from the intelligent function module during 1401 initial communication stage The CPU module is experiencing hardware problems Contact your The size of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module is nearest Mitsubishi representative Rem wrong 1402 The intelligent function module was accessed in the program but This suggests a CPU hardware error Contact your nearest O there was no response Mitsubishi representative Rem e There was no response from the intelligent function module when The intelligent function module that was being accessed is O 1403 the END instruction is executed experiencing hardware problems Contact your nearest Mitsubishi Rem An error is detected at the intelligent function module representative When performing a parameter I O allocation the intelligent function 1414 module could not be accessed during initial communications Oo On error occurring the head I O number of the corresponding Rem special function module is stored in the common information The intelligent function module the CPU module or the base unit is riencing problems Con r nearest Mitsubishi The FROM TO instruction set could not be executed due to a renesonive elie Contact you acs 1412 system bus error with a intelligent function module On error occurring the program error location is stored in the individual information 1 Change the High Performance model QC
137. ctors for installing the power supply module I O modules and intelligent function 4 Extension cable connector module Module connector To those connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed apply the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module to prevent entry of dirt Blank cover module applicable to Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B and Q612B QG60 5 Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit g Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B and Q612B Screw size M3 x 12 6 Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit on the panel of the control panel g Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B and Q612B For M4 screw DIN rail adapter mounting hole DIN rail adapter mounting hole 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 4 Setting the Extension Base Unit The number of stages setting method of each extension base unit to be used when extension base units are installed is described below Stage No setting connector Setting of Stage Number for Extension Base Units Number Setting for Extension Stages ist stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage 6th stage 7th stage le o exe oo co oo oo oo oo
138. d Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed in a main sequence program Stores the block number and the step number if status latch is executed in a SFC program Block No Step No BIN BIN t Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Stores the software version of the internal system in ASCIl code The data in the lower byte position is indefinite The software version is stored in the higher byte position Higher byte Lower byte For version A for example 41H is stored Note The software version of the initial system may differ from the version indicated by the version information printed on the rear of the case In the self loopback test of the serial communication module the serial communication module writes reads data automatically to make communication checks Stores the number of empty blocks in the communication request registration area to the remote terminal module connected to the MELSECNET MINI S3 master unit A2C or A52G 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion D1085 SD1090 SD1091 SD1094 SD251 Special Register for Modification Register for setting time check value D9085 Microcomputer subroutine input data area head device No Head I O number for replacement D9101 D9102 D3103 Fuse blown module D9104 D910
139. d for multiple CPU system processing 14 2 9 Precautions for making online module change 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM I O NUMBERS 15 1 Concept behind Allocating I O Numbers 15 1 1 I O modules and intelligent function module I O numbers 15 1 2 I O number of CPU module 15 2 Purpose of PLC Parameter I O Allocations with the GX Developer 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM S QCPUS AND MOTION CPUs 16 1 Automatic Refresh of Common CPU Memory 16 2 Communication with Multiple CPU Commands and Intelligent Function Module Devices 16 3 Interactive Communications between The Process CPU and Motion CPU 16 3 1 Control instructions from the Process CPU to the motion CPU 16 3 2 Reading and writing device data 16 4 CPU Shared Memory 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 17 1 Range of Control PLC Communications 17 2 Range of Non control PLC Communications 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM PROCESS CPUs 18 1 Concept behind QCPU Scanning Time 18 2 Factor to Prolong the Scan Time 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM 19 1 Flow chart for Starting Up the Multiple CPU System 19 2 Setting Up the Multiple CPU System Parameters Multiple CPU Settings Control PLC Settings 19 2 1 System configuration 19 2 2 Creating new systems 19 2 3 Using existing preset multiple CPU settings and I O allocations APPENDICES APPENDIX 1 Special Relay List APPENDIX 2 Special Register
140. d the extension base unit Q60B Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit Q60B and extension base unit Q501B 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q List for Calculating Voltage Drops Occurring at Extension Cables when connecting Q6LB between Q30B and Q50B Position of extension base unit Voltage drop caused by extension cable from the main base unit to the Q6UB Qs501B Q5DB IN connector V Extension stage 1 Extension stage 2 V R1 Re2 I1 Extension stage 1 Extension stage 3 V R1 R2 R3 I1 Extension stage 2 The voltage supplied to the IN connector of the Q501B reaches 4 75 VDC or higher on the condition that the voltage drop V at the extension cable between the main base unit and Q5DB is 0 15 VDC or lower 3 When the GOT is bus connected a Selection condition 4 75VDC or higher should be supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B b How to calculate voltage to IN connector The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4 90VDC Therefore the Q50B can be used if the voltage drop is 0 15VDC or lower 4 9VDC 4 75VDC 0 15VDC Main base unit Q30B Extension Cable Power Extension Cable supply Conductor Type module yP Resistance Q R1 Extension base unit Q50B QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B Number of GOTs connected Max 5 units Symbol Description Voltage d
141. ds to SM92 Corresponds to SM93 F number setting Timer time limit 0 to 255 setting 1 to 255 s 1 s units Corresponds to SM94 Corresponds to SM95 Corresponds to SM96 e Timer is started by turning SM90 through SM99 ON during active step and if the transition conditions for the relevant steps are not met within the timer limits the designated annunciator F will go ON Corresponds to SM97 Corresponds to SM98 Corresponds to SM99 3 300bps 6 600bps 96 9600bps 192 19 2kbps 576 57 6kbps 1152 115 2kbps 24 2400bps 48 4800bps 384 38 4kbps MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU DTT Set by When set Corresponding CPU Instruction execution Instruction execution 11 64 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 2 System information Corresponding r Number Name Meaning Explanation Pale ACPU ee po TT e The switch status of the remote I O module is stored in the following format B15 New Remote 4 gt 1 Remote I O module switch status Always 1 STOP The CPU module switch status is stored in the following format B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO T T T T T T T T T T T T q L L L L L gt a L va L gt lt L L L gt Status of Status of CPU Vacant switch switch CPU switch status S Every END New Memory card switch Always OFF processing i B8 through BC correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 0 OFF
142. dule into RUN status reset the CPU module with the RESET L CLR or set the RUN STOP switch again from STOP to RUN The RUN LED turns on 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering 11 7 The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the ERR LED of the CPU module turns on or flickers at PLC power on at operation start or during operation ERR LED is on flickering Confirm details of error by GX Developer Refer to Section 11 3 Hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Set the RUN STOP switch to STOP Modify error details Refer to Section 11 3 Reset by the RESET L CLR switch Set the RUN STOP switch to RUN Can the ERR LED be turned off Completion 11 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 8 When the USER LED is turned on If the USER LED turns on follow the steps described below The USER LED turns on when an error is detected by the CHK instruction or the annunciator F turns on If the USER LED is on monitor the special relays SM62 and SM80 in the monitor mode of GX Developer e When M62 has turned ON The annunciator F is ON Using SD62 to SD79 check the error cause e When SM80 has turned ON The USER LED was on by the execution of the CHK instruction Using SD80 check the error cause Elimi
143. e INPUT 1 gT Oh 100 120VAC vy Connect to 24VDC terminals of I O module that Q ires 24VDC internally edz 4 Extension base unit Q68B Extension cable H Q61P A1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Q ro m Epp 4 of ERR x1 0 100VAC QF teh ie im copocopoo JO 100 120VAC Grund wire CO SL Grounding POINTS 1 Use the thickest possible max 2 mm 14 AWG wires for the 100 200 VAC and 24 VDC power cables Be sure to twist these wires starting at the connection terminals To prevent a short circuit should any screws loosen use solderless terminals with insulation sleeves 2 When the LG terminals and FG terminals are connected be sure to ground the wires Do not connect the LG terminals and FG terminals to anything other than ground If LG terminals and FG terminals are connected without grounding the wires the PLC may be susceptible to noise In addition since the LG terminals have potential the operator may receive an electric shock when touching metal parts 3 1 An error cannot be output from the ERR terminal of the power supply module loaded on the extension base To output an error use the ERR terminal of the power supply module loaded on the main base unit 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 1 lt DANGER N CAUTION Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause shock Correctly connect the battery Also do not charge
144. e and do not device is for system use turn on or off The request contents cannot be executed in the Do not conduct a request for a specified intelligent specified intelligent function module function module in which an error has occurred The access range exceeds the buffer memory Check the header address and access number of points range of the specified intelligent function and access using a range that exists in the intelligent module function module The specified intelligent function module cannot Check that the specified intelligent function module is be accessed operating normally The intelligent function module does not exist in Check the header I O No of the specified intelligent the specified position function module Check that there is no error in the intelligent function A control bus error has occurred module or in the hardware of another module The setting required to conduct simulation has EA Conduct a simulation setting not been made simulation is not in 16point unit correct them to 16 point units online module change module change module change of a non control module module change before the PC CPU module starts module has started Stop an online module change Perform an online module change after changing the parameter setting Online module change is inhibited by the parameter setting in the multiple CPU system App 3 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Error Error toes G code EO Error de
145. e intelligent function module Input refresh Executed Output refresh Executed FROM TO instruction Executed Instruction using intelligent function Executed module device function module function module Buffer memory batch monitor c Click the Execution button to enable a module change The following table indicates the status of communication with the module changed online when the following screen is being displayed Executed Operation gt Target module Target Module Item Not Executed Module change execution 1 0 address 010H t dul f h Not executed nput module reires i il Installation confirmation Pauen ar Data IS held Status l Output module refresh Not executed Changing module O mixed module ee a Input refresh cin The module can be exchanged Output refresh Not executed Please execute after installing a new module 3 Intelligent function module Input refresh Not executed Output refresh Not executed FROM TO instruction Instruction using intelligent function module device instruction dedicated for Intelligent function module automatic refresh of intelligent function module Communication error Cancel Module control restart Cancel No processing Buffer memory batch monitor 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULE MELSEC Q d Disconnect the external wiring and dismount the module Refer to Section 9 3 3 for module dismounting
146. e SFC program step corresponding to its numerical value program error location 4602 ne START instruction in an SFC program is proceeded by an END and correct the problem te instruction The program is automatically subjected to an initial start 4610 The active step information at presumptive start of an SFC program is incorrect 4611 Key switch was reset during RUN when presumptive start was designated for SFC program 4620 Startup was executed at a block in the SFC program that was already started up 4621 Startup was attempted at a block that does not exist in the SFC Read common error information at a GX Developer check error g gram J Blockin ihe SFG R step corresponding to its numerical value program error location 4630 tartup was executed at a block in the program that was and correct the problem already started up 4631 Startup was attempted at a block that does not exist in an SFC program be designated by the SFC program 4633 There were too many simultaneous active steps in all blocks that can be designated Program scan time for initial execution type programs exceeds the initial execution WDT time setting designated in the PLC RAS parameter 5001 The program scan time goes over the WDT value set in the parameter PLC RAS parameter 1 The scan time of the program exceeded the constant scan 1 Review the constant scan setting time setting time specified in the PC RAS setting parameter 2 Review the constant
147. e This Manual This manual is prepared for users to understand the hardware specifications of those modules such as the CPU modules power supply modules and base units maintenance and inspections of the system and troubleshooting required when you use MELSEC Q series PLCs The manual is classified roughly into three sections as shown below 1 Chapters 1 and 2 Describe the outline of the CPU module and the system configuration The basics of the system configuration of CPU module are described 2 Chapters 3to 7 Describe the general specifications indicating the operating environments of the CPU module power supply module and base units and the performance specifications of these modules 3 Chapters 8to10 Describe the overall maintenance such as the installation of the CPU module daily inspections and troubleshooting This manual does not explain the functions of the CPU module For these functions refer to the manual shown below e Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following general names and abbreviations in the descriptions of the Process CPU unless otherwise specified Generic Term Abbreviation Process CPU General name for Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU modules Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series Programmable Logic Controller Abbreviation for small types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A Series Programmable Logic AnS Serie
148. e following additional instructions and functions e Process control instructions 52 instructions e Auto tuning function e Online module change e MELSECNET H multiplex remote I O system compatibility 1 For details of the added instructions and auto tuning function refer to the QnPHCPU Programming Manual Process Control Instructions 2 For details of online module change refer to Section 4 6 of this manual 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 1 Features Process CPU has the following new features 1 52 instructions added as process control instructions 52 additional instructions are capable of high level process control 2 2 degree of freedom PID control system The 2 degree of freedom PID control system adopted enables optimum response to both set value variation and disturbance variation 3 Addition of auto tuning function PID constant initial value setting The auto tuning function automates control parameter adjustment shortens adjustment saves the labor of operators and control engineers and resolves differences in adjustment results between individuals 4 Module can be changed online online module change When a module fails you can change it without stopping the system Online module change applies to the Q series I O modules and to the A D converter D A converter thermocouple input and temperature control modules of function version C and later 5 Multiplex remote I O system of MELSECNET H can be con
149. e power supply Rem 1 Change the battery 1 Voltage in the CPU module battery F 1600 2 If the battery is for program memory standard RAM or for the EJ 2 The CPU module battery is not connected back up power function install a lead connector 1601 ee patery on memory card 1 has dropped below Change the battery Read the error common information at the GX Developer and VO module information power ON is changed check and or change the module that corresponds to the numerical 0 sotali AP value module number there sbi K one po e gen oncion module not installed properly or Afternatively monitor the special registers SD1400 to SD1431 at Rem the GX Developer and change the fuse at the output module whose bit has a value of 1 The High Performance model QCPU of function version A was Change the High Performance model QCPU of function version A loaded in a multiple CPU system configuration for the High Performance model QCPU of function version B x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 22 11 22 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Error Code Common Individual LED Status Operating J inn i Error Messages Information Information a of Diagnostic Timing SD0 gt 1 ERROR SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 2100 2103 SP UNIT LAY ERR Unit module No Flicker Stop At power ON At reset 2106 2107 x 1 Ch
150. e widest contact surface as shown below AUI cable Shield Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield b Use shielded twisted pair cables as the twisted pair cables connected to the 10BASE T 100BASE TX connector For the shielded twisted pair cables strip part of the outer cover and earth the exposed shield section to the ground on the widest contact surface as shown below Shielded twisted pair cables Shield Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield c Always use double shielded coaxial cables as the coaxial cables connected to the 10BASE2 connectors Earth the double shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground Shield here Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield Ethernet is the registered trademark of XEROX Co LTD I O signal lines and other communication cables For the I O signal lines and other communication cables lines RS 232 RS 422 CC Link etc if extracted to the outside of the control panel also ensure to earth the shield section of these lines and cables in the same manner as in item 1 above 8 4 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 1 4 Power supply module Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short circuiting them 8 1 5 Others 1 Ferrite core A ferrite core has the effect of reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz band It is not required to fit ferrite cores to cables but it is recommended to fit fe
151. ear flag ON Output claered instruction N N mM s N 3 NI D N loo x 5 Alternates between ON and OFF according to the 2n minute clock n seconds specified at SD414 Default n 30 1 minute seconde 7 Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even seconds during scan if corresponding time has elapsed e Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset clock x 1 minute clock indicates the name of the special relay M9034 of the ACPU 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Relay Conversion Modification ON re ON M9037 SM1037 Always O OFF ON for 1 scan ON M9038 SM1038 ec only after RUN OFF 3 i li scan RUN flag After ON M9039 SM1039 scan only OFF PAUSE enable OFF PAUSE disabled M9040 SM1040 SM206 ON PAUSE enabled USE OFF PAUSE not in effect M9041 SM1041 SM204 ON PAUSE in effect SM1043 RUN OFF for 1 1 scan OFF Sampling trace in progress ON Sampling trace completed SamplingTrace Shes completed oO pS wo HERDED PE STRA Same as execution oO fo K R Sampling trace STRAR Same as execution SM1044 SM1045 SM1046 SM1047 SM1049 SM1051 SM1052 SM1054 SM1055 SM1056 SM105
152. ed the LED display flicker is made according to the error number setting priorities D3039 format Priorities 5 to 8 The setting areas for priorities are as follows B15 B12B11 B8B7 B4B3 BO SD207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1 SD208 Priority 8 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5 LED display SD209 i Priority 10 Priority 9 priority Default Value SD207 H4321 U ranking Priorities 9 to SD208 H8765 New 10 SD207 H00A9 No display is made if 0 is set However even if 0 has been set information concerning CPU operation stop including parameter settings errors will be indicated by the LEDs without conditions The year last two digits and month are stored as BCD code at SD210 as shown below Clock data B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4 B3 go Example lock a D902 Clock data year month 1 July 93 9025 I H9307 e day and hour are stored as BCD code at SD211 as shown Clock data t to so Example S U T T R Clock data tay hour 31st 10 a m Request D9026 O Rem l H3110 The minutes and seconds after the hour are stored as BCD code at SD212 as shown below Clock data B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 Clock data minute 35 min 48 sec D9027 second after the hour i H3548 Stores the year two digits and the day of the week in SD213 in the BCD code format as shown below BiS S BIRI to B8 Ee te Ba Gi te Be Example Ta FEIRET Friday Lapa
153. ed at intervals of set value x 10 ms Scan time Scan time is stored and updated in BIN code after scan time 1 ms units every END When the PC CPU starts running it starts counting 1 every second Count repeats changing from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 e Year lower 2 digits and month are stored into D1025 in BCD code as shown below B15 to Bi2Bi1 to B8B7 to B4B3 to BO or Month Day and hour are stored into SD1026 in BCD code as shown below B15 to B12B11_ to B8B7 to B4B3 to B0 Example H3110 noy igure e Minute and second are stored into SD1027 in BCD code as shown below B15 to B12B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 to ine Second H3548 Day of week is stored into SD1028 in BCD code as shown below B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4B3 to Bo Friday Po Sunday e Saturday Example 1987 July H8707 Example 35 minutes Example 0 must be set SD648 Extension file Use block No Stores the block No of the extension file register register being used in BCD code e Designate the device number for the extension file register for direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037 in BIN data Use consecutive numbers beginning with RO of block No 1 to designate device numbers Exetension file register Block No 1 area Block No 2 area D1036 SD1037 Device No BIN data Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate or flicker to indicate errors with error code
154. ed by the groove under the word OUT on the base cover must be removed with a tool such as nippers Connector for installing the power supply module CPU module I O modules and intelligent function module To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module QG60 to prevent entry of dirt e Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit Screw size M3 x 12 5 Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel of the control panel for M4 screw DIN rail adapter p Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter mounting hole Module connector 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 2 Extension base unit Q5 _ B Q6 L B Q52B Q55B Connectors for sending and receiving signals from the main base unit or the other extension base units to which the extension cables are connected Do not remove the supplied connector cover Base cover Protective cover of extension cable connector 3 Stages No setting Connector for setting the number of stages of the extension base unit connector For setting method see Section 6 4 Conne
155. ee LED Status LeD Status Spear of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 ERROR Stop At power ON At reset 1401 SP UNIT DOWN Unit module No Off On Flicker On Continue When intelligent function module 3 is accessed When an intelligent function 1402 Program error location module access instruction is Stop executed SP UNIT DOWN Unit module No Off On Flicker On Continue 1403 3 gt When an END instruction is executed At power ON At reset Flicker Stop During execution of FROM TO instruction set PEE i Wen AN END instruction is CONTROL BUS ERR Unit module No Program error location CONTROL BUS ERR CONTROL BUS ERR Unit module No SEa H sep sop easy END instruction is CONTROL BUS ERR When an END instruction is 141 EA ee No AtpowerON Atreset meg ON At reset Pe beac BATTERY ERROR Drive Name Continue Always i601 BAT ALM LED On Stop When an END instruction is UNIT VERIFY ERR Unit module No Off On Flicker On Continue x2 executed x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 3 Stop continue operation is selectable for each module by setting parameters 11 21 11 21 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres obo et Error Contents and Cause Corrective A
156. eeeaeeeaeeeaeeeatenas 11 12 11 2 14 Flowchart for when Unable to Write a program oo eeeeeceeeeeseeeneeeeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeatenas 11 13 11 2 15 Flowchart for when it is unable to perform boot operation from memory Card eee 11 15 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR OCCUIS cccceeceesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeeeieeeaeens 11 16 11 2 17 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR OCCUIS cecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeseeeeaeeaeseeeeaeeaees 11 17 VASE rrOr COME Citoren a eaaa A EE E EEE E E EO 11 18 11 3 1 Procedure for reading error COCES ee eeceeeceeseeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeenas 11 18 112322 Error code listao nn eI EA a le a 11 19 11 4 Canceling Of Errors ccceccesccececeeseeececeeeeeeeaecaeeseeeaecaecaeesaeaesessaeeaecaesaeseaeeaecaesaeeaecaeseeseaeeaeeaeeeeseateaes 11 37 11 5 I O Module Troubleshooting a siia a a E aa aa aaa A aaa 11 38 11 5 1 Input Circuit troUDIESNOOTING erii ee eee eeteeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateeaeeeaeenas 11 38 11 5 2 Output circuit troubleshooting eececceceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeaecaecaeeeeeeaeeaecaeseeesaesaeseeseaesaeeeseaeeatas 11 41 1 1 6 SpecialRelay Listini na eeec niall lee 11 42 11 7 Special Register List saraet i lod tient eel ainda nea le 11 58 APPENDIX 1 Error Code Return to Origin During General Data Processing c ceceeseeeeereetees App 1 APPEND
157. eeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeeaeeeatenas 9 14 9 4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unit cccecceccecceseeeeeeeceeeeseeeecaeeeeeeaneaesaeeeeeeaeeaes 9 16 9 5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable ccccecceceeseeeeceeceeeeseeeeceeseeeaesaeeeeseaeeaeeaeeneeeaeeaees 9 17 OG WING e neat Aaah int tae latin ial iain alin itil ann iniatdladinietut iad 9 20 9 6 1 The precautions on the WING cee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeneeeaeesatesas 9 20 9 6 2 Connecting to the power supply module eececeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaecaesaeseeeaesaesaeseaeeaeeaeseeeeneas 9 23 10 1 Daly IS POSTON esia en exe fh caceae ok vn exe Hand oeed din are anda etdin an Mando etdig atl dade edi an andrei an ENTE 10 2 10 2 Periodic INSpectonis t 224 tennis cite tit ea Aida tit ea Aida anette 10 3 10 3 Battery Replacement i ci 2e cesetcec eine in el edd ei el del eae ladec ein elie liane 10 4 10 31 Battery lleva tuna statis Seti Stee Sa aiid Seb Sel aad Ses 10 5 A 8 A 8 10 3 2 Battery replacement procedure ee eeceeeceeeeeeneeeneeeseeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeenaeenatenatenas 10 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 to 11 89 1181 Troubleshooting Basics eoep sweeties sue ghakasuegsdva sve chavs seu cades exe ghava svugh dna eveghars sx ENEE 11 1 TL2 Troubles MOOUUMG rrn arana aaa RSA R O 11 2 11 2 1 Troubleshooting lowehar
158. ension cable between the extension base unit extension stage n 1 and extension base unit extension stage n Vn R1 Cable resistance between the main base unit and extension base unit Cable resistance between the extension base unit extension stage n 1 and extension base unit extension stage n Rn 11 to I7 5VDC current consumption among extension stage 1 to 7 1 x1 Sum total of current consumed by Q50B and currents consumed by the I O intelligent function modules loaded on the Q50B The symbols including I 11 to I7 vary with the modules loaded on the extension base unit For details of the symbol refer to the user s manuals of the module used 6 7 6 7 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q List for Calculating Voltage Drops Occurring at Extension Cables in System Consisting of Extensions 1 to 7 QSOB Voltage Drop at Extension Cable on Corresponding Extension Unit Sum Total of Voltage Loading Drops to IN Connector Position of OSDIB V Extension Jay 14 a age 1 a ae v V1 Extension Extension pg R1 11 12 13 14 R2 12 13 14 R3 I3 14 R4 14 P f fvevtevenvarva ig fight R2 12 13 14 15 R3 13 14 15 R4 14 15 R5 15 f avave Extension R1 1 12 13 14 R2 12 13 14 15 V V 1 V2 V3 V4 V5 stage 6 15 16 16 PAUS TEESHS evened ieee eee ee Extension RA1 1 l2 13 14 Ra 2 13 14 5 R3 13 14 15 16 V V 1 V24 V3 V4 V5 stage 7 415416417 s67 a R4 I4415 16 17 R5
159. equired stage number location of the connector PIN1 existing between the IN and OUT sides of the extension cable connector 3 Install the base cover to the extension base unit and tighten the base cover screw Tightening torque 36 to 48N cm 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable 1 Instructions for handling an extension cable e Do not stamp an extension cable e An extension cable must be connected to the base unit when the base cover has been installed After you have set the extension number to the extension base unit reinstall and screw the base cover e When running an extension cable the minimum bending radius of the cable should be 55mm 2 17 inch or more If itis less than 55mm 2 17 inch a malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration open cable or the like e When connecting or disconnecting an extension cable do not hold the ferrite cores mounted at both ends of the cable Hold the connector part of the cable for connection or disconnection l Holding the ferrite core may cause the cable to open within the connector Also if the ferrite core is shifted the characteristic will change When handling the cable take care not to shift the ferrite core positions 2 Connection of extension cable POINT When connecting an extension base unit to the
160. er Front Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct direction Connect the lead to the connector Close the cover of the CPU module Install the CPU module into the base unit Turn on the PLC power supply Monitor OFF SM51 to verify on off ON Monitor SD52 to verify the bit number that is on Bits other than 0 are on Bit 0 is on The CPU module battery is faulty 10 7 The memory card battery is faulty Refer to Section 10 3 2 2 y Completion 10 7 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 2 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure Replace the SRAM card battery in the following procedure POINTS Replace the battery while paying attention to the following a To back up the data replace the SRAM card battery with the PLC power supply ON and the SRAM card installed b Start replacement after backing up the CPU module data using GX Developer c Since replacement is made with the PLC power supply ON take extreme care not to get an electric shock d When dismounting or mounting the battery holder on the SRAM card take care so that the battery does not come out of the battery holder e When replacing the battery with the PLC power supply OFF always back up the data before starting replacement Battery replacement procedure 1 Back up the SRAM card data
161. er SD751 28th character 27th character Message Message SD752 30th character 29th character S During storage storage SD753 32nd character 31st character execution nev O SD754 34th character 33rd character SD755 36th character 35th character SD756 38th character 37th character SD757 40th character 39th character SD758 42nd character 41st character SD759 44th character 43rd character SD760 46thcharacter 45th character SD761 48th character 47th character SD762 50th character 49th character SD763 52nd character 51st character SD764 54th character 53rd character SD765 56th character 55th character SD766 58th character 57th character SD767 60th character 59th character SD768 62nd character 61st character SD769 64th character 63rd character 11 75 11 75 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU 7 Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows B15 B1 BO 163 149 148 Mask pattern of IMASK Mask pattern 179 165 164 instruction S During execution 11 76 11 76 11 TROUBLESHOOTING ACPU Special Conversion D9000 SD1000 D9001 SD1001 11 77 MELSEC Q 7 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to the special registers SD1000 to SD1255 after A series to the Q QnA series conversi
162. er is established RA2 goes ON Power to output equipment switched OFF when ERR contact turns OFF the case of an emergency stop or a stop caused by a limit switch 4 Timer TM times out after the DC power reaches 100 The TM set value should be the period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 DC voltage Set this value to approximately 0 5s 5 Turn ON the start switch 6 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the program If a voltage relay is used at RA2 no timer TM is requi ired in the program 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 3 Fail safe measures against failure of the PLC Power supply Failure of a CPU module or memory can be detected by the self diagnosis function However failure of I O control area may not be detected by the CPU module In such cases all I O points turn ON or OFF depending on a condition of problem and normal operating conditions and operating safety cannot sometimes be maintained Though Mitsubishi PLCs are manufactured under strict quality control they may cause failure or abnormal operations due to unspecific reasons To prevent the abnormal operation of the whole system machine breakdown and accidents fail safe circuitry against failure of the PLC must be constructed outside the PLC Examples of a system and its fail safe circuitry are described below lt System example gt CP
163. er is turned on to the PLC or when the CPU module is reset 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Performance Specifications continued Item Remark Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Number of I O devices points 8192 points X YO to 1FFF Number of devices usable on program Number of points Number of occupied I O points 4096 points X YO to FFF accesible to actual I O modules Default 8192 points MO to 8191 Latch relay L Default 8192 points LO to 8191 Link relay B Default 8192 points BO to 1FFF Default 2048 points TO to 2047 for low high speed timer Select between low high speed timer by instructions The measurement unit of the low high speed timer is set with parameters Low speed timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit default 100ms High speed timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms unit default 10ms Default 0 point for low high speed retentive timer 4 Switchover between the low high speed retentive timer is set by instructions Number of use points Retentive timer ST The measurement unit of the low high speed retentive timer is set is set with parameters with parameters Low speed retentive timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit default 100ms High speed retentive timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms unit default 10ms Normal counter default 1024 points CO to 1023 Counter C e Interrupt counter maximum 256 points default 0 point set with parameters Data register D register Data register D Default 1
164. ernal dimensions 27 4mm 1 08inch 89 3mm 3 52inch 0 20kg 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 2 Part Names and Settings This section explains the part names and settings of the module Front face With front cover open Q25PHCPU 1 m D S l MODE 2 M 9 gt m pun 5 P so USER useR a 4 mot 2 6 10 3 13 7 5 STOP RUN 14 RESET LCLR 15 11 When opening the front cover put your finger here Side face 16 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Application Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit Single motion installation Indicates the mode of the CPU module 2 Mode LED ON green Q mode Flicker green Enforced ON OFF for external I O registered Indicates the operating status of the CPU module ON During operation in RUN status OFF During a stop in STOP status or detection of error whose occurrence stops operation Flicker When parameter program is written at STOP and RUN STOP switch is changed from STOP to RUN To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the program carry out the following steps e Set the RUN STOP switch from RUN gt STOP
165. es the status of communication with the module changed onlinely when the following screen is displayed MELSOFT series GX Developer x Executed T Module O gigs MUUE Nem Not Executed Online module change completed Input module refresh E Output module refresh O mixed module Input refresh Output refresh Intelligent function module Input refresh Output refresh Executed FROM TO instruction Instruction using intelligent function Executed module device instruction dedicated for Intelligent Executed function module automatic refresh of intelligent Executed function module Buffer memory batch monitor 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1 Specification 5 1 1 Power supply module specifications This section gives the specifications of the power supply modules item 10 10 10 30 inpukBaney su 100 to 120VAC gog 200 to 240VAC mo 100 to 240VAC so 24VDC rro 85 to 132VAC 170 to 264VAC 85 to 264VAC 15 6 to 31 2VDC Input frequency OP OBOHZ HHH CC Within 5 See section 5 1 3 aa Max inputapparentpower OVA Max inputpower o ooo l c S aw OE Rated output current avoe o i d oaa y gt i O External output voltage o Ta HON S Overcurrent 6 6A or more 3 3A or more 6 6A or more 5 protectionx1 f24vbe EA rmore CT Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 Permissible instantaneous power spa Within 10ms Across inputs LG and outputs F
166. etwork and the machinery within premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 2 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used Pollution level 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally 3 Do not use or store the PLC under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Doing so can cause a malfunction When using the PLC under pressure please contact your sales representative 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q MEMO 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE 4 1 Performance Specification The table below shows the performance specifications of the CPU module Performance Specifications iak O Mode E Ana Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Control method Repetitive operation of stored program Direct I O is possible by I O control mode Refresh mode direct I O specification DXO DYO Sequence control Relay symbol language logic symbolic language Programming dedicated language MELSAP3 SFC MELSAP L Function block P PX anguage Process control Process contiol FBD rogramming using language Developer Processing speed LD X0 0 034 us FT Seque
167. evice When switched from OFF to ON STRA instruction When switched from ON to OFF STRAR instruction The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for the sampling trace At scanning at time Time 10 msec unit e The SM1015 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when the ZCOM instruction and data communication request batch processing are executed used when the scan time exceeds 200 ms e Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application instruction in sequence program e SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without regard to position of key switch on CPU module front SM1038 and SM1039 are under the same condition as RUN status except when the key switch is at STOP position and turned off and on Switched off if the key switch is in STOP position SM1038 is on for one scan only and SM10339 is off for one scan only if the key switch is not in STOP position When remote pause contact has turned on and SM204 is on PAUSE mode is set and SM206 is turned on Sampling trace is not executed unless SM801 is turned ON Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF e When SM701 is OFF characters up to NUL 00H code are output When SM701 is ON ASCII codes of 16 characters are output e Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction Switched ON when program transfer is requested Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete Whe
168. ewly stored at each END Namely the minimum value of scan time is stored into SD520 in BIN code D9018 SD1018 SD524 Spt ina Scan ume Scan time is stored in BIN code at each END and 10 ms units always rewritten 11 79 11 79 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Register after Register for Conversion Conversion Modification D9019 D1019 SD526 D9020 D1020 D9021 D1021 D9022 Special lt b scan 1 second D1022 counter a n a n a D412 Clock data Clock data Clock data D1028 Clock data psoas soro35 035 D9036 SD1036 x D9037 SD1037 pA D9038 D1038 SD207 D9039 SD1039 SD208 11 80 Extension file registerfor designation of device number LED display priority ranking Maximum scan time 10 ms units Constant scan time User sets in 10 ms units Count in units of 1ms Clock data year month Clock data day hour Clock data minute second Clock data day of week Device number when individual devices from extension file register are directly accessed Priorities 1 to 4 Priorities 5 to 7 If scan time is larger than the content of SD526 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in BIN code Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples of 10 ms 0 No setting 1 to 200 Set Program is execut
169. figured By mounting the remote master station of the MELSECNET H you can configure the multiplex remote I O system of the MELSECNET H 6 Compatibility with process control dedicated software package Use of PX Developer allows PID control programs to be created easily with function blocks Combination with the process control software package PX Developer provides excellent engineering environment 1 For details of the added instructions and auto tuning function refer to the QnPHCPU Programming Manual Process Control Instructions 2 For details of online module change refer to Section 4 6 of this manual 3 When using the Process CPU use GX Developer Version 7 10L or later 4 Use PX Developer in combination with GX Developer Version 7 10L or later Refer to the PX Developer manual for details 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 7 Controllable multiple I O points Process CPUs support 4096 points X YO to FFF as the number of actual I O points capable of getting access to the I O module installed on the base unit They also support 8192 points max X YO to 1FFF as the number of I O devices which can be used in the remote I O stations such as MELSECNET H remote I O NET and CC Link data link Lineup according to program capacity The optimum CPU module for the program capacity to be used can be selected Q12PHCPU 124k step Q25PHCPU 252k step Realised high speed processing Depending on the type of the sequencer high
170. from memory card 11 15 The following shows the flowchart that must be followed when the boot operation of the CPU module cannot be performed using the memory card Unable to perform boot operation Is there CPU module error Remove the cause of the error Is it able to perform boot operation Is the drive that stores the parameter file specified Set the DIP switch 2 and 3 to the drive in which the parameter file is stored Is it able to perform boot operation Is a file set with parameter boot file setup Set a file to boot file setup Is it able to perform boot operation Is a file set with parameter program setup Set a file to program setup Is it able to perform boot operation Is boot operation file stored in the memory card Write a file to the memory card Is it able to perform boot operation Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description P 9 P Completion of the problem 11 15 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs The following shows the flowchart to be followed when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs at PLC power on or during operation UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs Check the slot where error occurred with the GX Developer Is the module of the applicable slot installed properly
171. functions such as the watchdog timer error detect problems In addition all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller 3 Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs module relay or transistor So build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short circuited load flows in the output module for a long time it may cause smoke or fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as fuse Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PLC main module power is turned on If the external power supply is turned on first it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation When there are communication problems with the data link refer to the corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q D DANGER When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the like to the special function module to exercise control data change on the running PLC configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that
172. ge or an error code is displayed When the request origin is an intelligent function module or network system an error is returned to the process that was requested APPENDIX 1 1 Error code overall explanation These error codes differs depending on the error No of the location the error was detected The following table shows the relationship between the error detection location and the error code Error detection location Eror Coue Error description reference destination hexadecimal CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH Refer to Appendix 1 2 Intelligent function 70004 to 7FFFH User s manuals of intelligent function module module Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Network system FOOOH to FFFFH Reference Manual App 1 App 1 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 1 2 Description of the errors of the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH The error contents of the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH detected by the CPU module and the messages displayed by the GX Developer are shown below Error code Error ie f Error description Countermeasure hexadecimal item Check the connection status of the connection cable 4000H Sum check error with the CPU module Remote request that is not handled was n 4001H execul d q Check the requested remote operation 4002H Command for which a global request cannot be Check the requested command 4003H performed was executed CPU module cannot execute the request 4004H it q Turn off the CPU module
173. gency stop protective circuits positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward reverse operations 2 When the PLC detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will stop calculation and hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting Note that the AnS series module will turn off the output in either of cases a and b a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage protection equipment b The PLC CPUs self diagnosis functions such as the watch dog timer error detect problems In addition all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller Build a fail safe circuit exterior to the PLC that will make sure the equipment operates safely at such times See section 9 1 of this manual for example fail safe circuits 3 Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs module relay or transistor So build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble DESIGN PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short circuited load flows in the output module for a long time it may cause smoke or fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as fuse Build a circuit that turns on the external powe
174. gram error location OPERATION ERROR Flicker On When instruction is executed 4102 Program error location op 4107 Program error location Continue 2 4200 FOR NEXT ERROR Program error location When instruction is executed 4201 4202 FOR NEXT ERROR Program error location Off Flicker Stop When instruction is executed 4203 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x 2 The CPU module operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 11 31 11 31 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres obo et Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU The refresh setting of the intelligent function module exceeded the hange the file register file for the one which allows refresh in the Oo 3301 file register capacity whole range The intelligent function module s refresh parameter setting is O outside the available range Check the parameter setting Rem 3302 The intelligent function module s refresh parameter are abnormal Check the parameter setting emi 1 Delete the automatic refresh setting or similar parameter setting of the intelligent function module under control of another station 2 Change the setting to the automatic refresh setting or similar parameter setting of the intelligent function module under control of the host station 3400 The first O number of the target module in
175. h other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation When controlling items like lamp load heater or solenoid valve using an output module large current approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances may flow when the output is turned OFF to ON Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this manual Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product Hold down the module loading lever at the module bottom and securely insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the PLC in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module When installing extension cables be sure that the connectors of base unit are installed correctly After installation check them for looseness Poor connections could cause an input or output failure Securely load the me
176. he PLC No 1 is normal including a PLC No 1 during si continuation error error e Comes ON when the PLC No 1 is during a stop error 2 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 2 is normal including a 2 during si continuation error e Comes ON when the PLC No 2 is during a stop error LC No 3 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 3 is normal including a PLC No 3 during s continuation error error Comes ON when the PLC No 3 is during a stop error PLC No 4 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 4 is normal including a No 4 CPU error r r fla ON PLC No 4 during si continuation error g error e Comes ON when the PLC No 4 is during a stop error New ew Max loaded I O OFF Ignored When this relay goes from OFF to ON maximum loaded u read ON Read VO number is read to SD250 Effective for the batch refresh All stations OFF Refresh arrival station also effective for the low speed cyclic U Every N refresh command JON Refresh all stations e Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or to END receive all slave stations No 1 CPU error flag No 2 CPU error flag No 3 CPU error flag SM206 SM213 SM235 SM236 SM244 SM245 SM246 SM247 SM250 SM254 11 44 11 44 11 MELSECNET H module 1 information MELSECNET H module 2 information MELSECNET H module 3 information MELSECNET H module 4 information CC Link error Presence absenc e of SFC program
177. he control station or the network parameters of the MELSECNET H operating in the control station were rewritten to the ordinary station The network parameters are reflected on the module side by making 1 The number of actually installed modules is different from that designated in the number of modules setting parameter of MELSECNET H 2 The head I O number of actually installed modules is different from that designated in the network parameter of MELSECNET H 3 Some data in the parameter cannot be handled 4 The station type of MELSECNET H has been changed while the power is on RESET RUN is required to change the station type e When the station number of the MELSECNET H module is 0 the inter PLC network parameter setting has been made e When the station number of the MELSECNET H module is other than 0 the remote master parameter setting has been made The network No specified by a parameter is different from that of the actually mounted network The head I O No specified by a parameter is different from that of the actually mounted I O unit The network class specified by a parameter is different from that of the actually mounted network The network refresh parameter of the MELSECNET H is out of the specified area A multi remote I O network was configured using a module that does not support the MELSECNET H multi remote I O network An error was discovered when the network parameter check was made at the
178. he correct file pointer hange the file name Cancel the write protection of the disk and execute he file pointer is insufficient he file of the same name exists The disk is write protected he drive does not respond he address or sector is not found he file cannot be accessed properly he drive format information is illegal At the time of file access time out occurred during waiting for access he path name is too long he disk is logically broken An attempt to make a file continuous failed There are enough free file areas which cannot he specified drive is ROM The same starting source has already opened the specified file An attempt was made to erase the mounted heck for the specified drive If it exists check its status heck if the target is a ROM drive or not xecute again after resetting the CPU ormat the target drive Execute again after some time heck the length of the path name hange the specified drive ojo JITLg 2 Optimize the specified drive to increase continuous free lox oO D x oO 5 Q O 5 5 O a lt Check the specified drive Format it for RAM Check if it is being processed by another application Execute again after dismounting the drive he Flash ROM is not formatted he memory card is not inserted sert or reinsert the memory card he memory card type differs heck the memory card type The requested processing cannot be perf
179. he memory card is Ve enable flag ON Remove insert enabled y y y init init n a e is pat 0 amp n fon O oo is pt fo N p amp Goes ON when memory card cannot be inserted or removed removed Initial z fez N oo is 3 z 0 A a D co gt OFF No drive 4 4 OFF File register not in use z A S Status SM640 File register use ON File register in use Goes ON when file register is in use OFF File register not nuse Goes ON when comment file is in use A ON File register in use change OFF Internal memory execution Goes ON while boot operation is in process S Status ON Boot operation in Goes OFF if boot designation switch is OFF change progress Q 3 3 Cc n Q Q wW Q O o ne D ed 2 Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range OFF Within access range of file register R of memory card A ON Outside access range Set within END processing e Reset at user program Memory card A D NI N e an 2 o lt SM604 SM622 Drive 3 flag SM650 access range flag 11 48 11 48 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 Instruction Related Special Relays Meaning OFF Carry OFF ON Carry ON SM700 Carry flag Number of output SM701 characters selection OFF Ascending order SM703 mo Descending order OFF Non match found SM704 Block comparison ON
180. hich the error occurred If the same error occurs again after the cancellation of the error it will be registered again in the error history When multiple enunciators F detected are canceled the first one with No F only is canceled 1 When the error is canceled with the error code to be canceled stored in the SD50 the lower one digit of the code is neglected Example If error codes 2100 and 2101 occur and error code 2100 to cancel error code 2101 If error codes 2100 and 2111 occur error code 2111 is not canceled even if error code 2100 is canceled 2 Errors developed due to trouble in other than the CPU module are not canceled even if the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 are used to cancel the error Example The cause of SP UNIT DOWN error cannot be removed even by using the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 because the error is developed on the Q bus Refer to the error code list in Section 11 3 2 to remove the cause of the error 11 37 11 37 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 5 I O Module Troubleshooting MELSEC Q This chapter explains possible problems with I O circuits and their corrective actions 11 5 1 Input circuit troubleshooting Input signal does not turn OFF Example 1 Input signal does not turn OFF Input signal does not turn OFF Input signal does not turn OFF a 2 Q E g x lt m n 2 Q E g x lt m 2 Q E g x lt 11 38
181. i oe 1 14 H0005 Sea Clock data Day of week S U Clock data D9028 O Rem day of week oe Sunday Request Higher digits Monday of year 0 to 99 Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday 11 66 11 66 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding y Set b C ondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ies a ACPU lige oa pL IT SD220 e LED display ASCII data 16 characters stored here B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD221 F D220 15th character from the right 16th character from the right SD222 SD221 13th character from the right 14th character from the right SD223 LED display Display indicator D222 11th character from the right 12th character from the right S When gt New D224 data data SD223 9th character from the right 10th character from the right changed O SD224 7th character from the right 8th character from the right SD225 SD225 5th character from the right 6th character from the right SD226 SD226 3rd character from the right 4th character from the right D227 1st character from the right 2nd character from the right D227 D235 Unit to which The header I O Online number of the unit S During figdule tonne Online Head I O No of module being changed online 10H is stored Online New change is module cxchange module being is being performed Exchange performed gt
182. ic Information Gases ean m c ie O ON if diagnosis results show error occurrence No Gitar Includes when an annunciator is ON and when an error Diagnostic errors id Error is detected with CHK instruction New i Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored W W WwW Comes ON when an error occurs as a result of self Self diagnosis No self diagnosis diagnosis Does not include when annunciator is ON or g errors when error is detected by CHK instruction S Error M9008 error Self diagnosis Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored No error common Error common information e When SM0 is ON ON if there is error common N information Error common information information No error common SM16 Error individual information When SMO is ON ON if there is error individual S Error Ne information Error common information information e M50 OFF gt ON Error reset e Conducts error reset operation U ON if battery voltage at CPU module or memory card drops below rated value Battery low latch Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is S Error M9007 restored e Synchronous with BAT ALARM LED OFF Normal Same as SM51 but goes OFF subsequently when Comes ON it a momentary power interruption of less than 20ms occurred during use of the AC power supply OFF Robe Deena module and reset by turning the power OFF then ON AC DC DOWN detected S Error M92005 dete
183. igent Digital analog converter module Supported by function function module Temperature input module version C Temperature control module The other modules cannot be changed online For whether the above intelligent function modules can be changed online or not and their changing procedures refer to the manuals of the intelligent function modules used b GX Developer that enables online module change GX Developer Version 7 10L or later is necessary for online module change An online module change is available from GX Developer via a network 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULE MELSEC Q c Base unit that enables online module change 1 For an online module change use the main base and Q6LIB extension base The module installed on the main base or Q6LIB extension base is not available for online change 2 The module installed on the Q5L1B extension base is not available for online change When the Q5L is in use the module installed on the main base is not available for online change d Control status of CPU module 1 An online module change is available when there is no stop error The following table indicates whether an online module change is available depending on the control status of the CPU module Control Status RUN Status 1 STOP Status PAUSE Status At Stop Error Online module change Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 1 This includes a RUN status at the occur
184. ing Speed sssssssrssrersisrerrsrernsenenne 4 1 Programming language 4 1 Q QC05B QC06B QC 12B QC30B QC50B OC 1O0OB waka eae ba 6 2 Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B External dimensions eeeeeeeeee App 10 Names Of parts ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 3 Specifications eenen 6 1 Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B External dimensions eeeeeeeeeeeeea App 12 Names Of Parts a a 6 4 Specifications eieren eeens 6 1 O Series sale ea eA A 12 R Remote RUN PAUSE contact eeee 4 3 S Specifications BaseN sersan a 6 1 Bate osia tite it eed 7 2 GRU iss eet coy ho aah ae oe bt ht a 4 1 Extension Cable ieren rinnen Enna 6 2 General 00 eeecceeceseeeseeeneeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeens 3 1 Memory card assssssesiesrssrssrensrnerrernerneenennnna 7 1 Power supply module s 5 1 System configuration Configured equipment 2 1 CONE iae a 2 3 Peripheral A VICC eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeees 2 2 T Tightening torque Of SCreW eseeeeen 9 9 Total number of instructions 4 1 W Weight Index 2 Bataria a A 7 2 GPU E EA Rai I T 4 3 Extensi n cable enrere 6 2 MeMOry Card aonana 7 1 Power supply module ssseeeeesesese 5 2 Wiring Extension cable eeeseeseerereersrrernernennes 2 3 Heat generation ecceceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 9 6 VO MOdUIe sti iagekniiiaaenialninince 9 25 Power supply module ceeeee 9 23 9 26 Wiring of the I O module ceeeeee 9 25 I
185. ing control number BUY Sy TESABUCE Do not subject to mechanical shock Bim ERAH REEDENI E Do not expose to extreme temperrature 10 5 10 5 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q Remember that the SRAM card consumes battery power even when the battery is connected to the CPU module and the power is turned ON If the special relay SM51 battery low latch turns on immediately replace the battery If an alarm has not yet occurred it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the conditions of use 10 6 10 6 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 3 2 Battery replacement procedure 1 CPU module battery replacement procedure When the CPU module battery has been exhausted replace the battery with a new one according to the procedure shown below The PLC power must be on for 10 minutes or longer before dismounting the battery Even when the battery is dismounted the memories are backed up by the capacitor for a while However if the replacement time exceeds the guaranteed value specified in the table below the contents stored in the memories may be erased To prevent this trouble replace the battery speedily Backup time by capacitor Backup time by capacitor min 3 Replacing battery Turn off the PLC power supply Remove the CPU module from the base unit Side of the CPU module Open the cover of the CPU module i o A TNA Remove the old battery from its hold
186. ing four types of information are stored here Slot No Number Meaning SD6 SD5 Slot No PLC No Base No 1 2 SD6 VO No Not used for base No SD7 SD8 SD9 SD7 8D10 SD11 Vacant SD12 SD13 SD8 D14 SD15 1 For a multiple CPU system the slot number or PLC number is stored depending on the error that occurred SD9 Slot 0 in the multiple CPU system is the one on the slot on the right of the rightmost CPU module Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has Error common been stored SE N Ate D10 common information PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 Error ew Rem information 2 If a fuse blown or I O verify error occurred in the module loaded in the MELSECNET H remote I O station the network number is SD11 stored into the upper 8 bits and the station number into the lower 8 bits Use the I O No to check the module where the fuse blown or I O verify error occurred apie File name Drive name Example Number Meaning ABCDERGH IJK SD5 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD13 SD6 42H B 41H A SD7 File name 44H D 43H C SD8 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD9 48H H 47H G SD14 SD10 Extension 3 2EH 49H 1 2EH SD11 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD12 SD13 Vacant SD14 SD15 SD15 Continued to next page 3 Refer to REMARK 1 Extensions a
187. ing password 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM This section describes the system configuration of the Process CPU cautions on use of the system and configured equipment 2 1 System Configuration The outline of the equipment configuration configuration with peripheral devices and 2 system configuration in the Process CPU system is described below iz Tiviumeartery Process CPU Battery Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q6BAT rT E Power supply module 1 O module Intelligent function module of the Q Series 1 Equipment configuration Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA Main base unit 2 Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Extension of the Q Series module lt J HOO uoo Extension cable Q50B extension base unit QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B Q52B Q55B QC50B QC100B Q6LB extension base unit Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B Power supply modu O module Intelligent function module of the Q Series POINTS 1 The number of memory cards to be installed is one sheet The memory card must be selected from SRAM card Flash card and ATA card according to the application and capacity With commercial memory cards the Operation is not a
188. instruction argument device VD 10 12 Constants 10 12 1 Decimal constants K 10 12 2 Hexadecimal constants H 10 12 3 Real numbers E 10 12 4 Character string 10 13 Convenient Uses for Devices 10 13 1 Global devices amp local devices 10 13 2 Device initial values 11 PROCESS CPU PROCESSING TIME 11 1 Reading Process CPU s Scan Time 11 2 Factors Responsible for Extended Scan Time 11 3 Factors Responsible for Shortened Scan Time 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO PROCESS CPU 12 1 Writing Procedure for 1 Program 12 1 1 Items to consider when creating one program 12 1 2 Procedure for writing programs to the Process CPU 12 2 Procedure for Multiple Programs 12 2 1 Items to consider when creating multiple programs 12 2 2 Procedure for writing programs to the Process CPU 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEMS 13 1 Features 13 2 Outline of Multiple CPU Systems 13 3 Differences with Single CPU Systems 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEMS 14 1 System Configuration 14 2 Precautions For Multiple CPU System Configuration 14 2 1 CPU module mounting positions 14 2 2 Precautions when using Q series I O modules and intelligent function modules 14 2 3 Modules that have mounting restrictions 14 2 4 Compatible GX Developers and GX Configurators 14 2 5 Parameters that enable the use of multiple CPU systems 14 2 6 Resetting the multiple CPU system 14 2 7 Processing when CPU module stop errors occur 14 2 8 Reducing the time require
189. iption Completion of the problem 11 12 11 12 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ae MELSEC Q 11 2 14 Flowchart for when unable to write a program The following shows the flowchart to be followed when programs cannot be written in the CPU module Unable to write a program Is the DIP switch SW1 set to OFF ON Turn the DIP switch SW1 system protect to OFF OFF NO YES Is it able to write a program Cancel the password using the YES GX Developer NO Is the password registered NO YES Is it able to write a program M Perform the following _ Sera Confirm whether the write protect switch is off or not Confirm if it is formatted Confirm the writing destination specification Is the memory program memory Program memory Perform the following Organize file Confirm memory space Is it able to write a program YES Confirm the writing destination specification NO YES Is it able to write a program Y v 1 3 2 3 11 13 11 13 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Vv Format program memory 11 14 Y Is it able to write a program Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem y Completion MELSEC Q 11 14 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 15 Flowchart for when it is unable to perform boot operation
190. line module change GX Developer 2 requested later is suspended The online module change GX Developer 1 already in execution is continued Process CPU GX Developer GX Developer 2 Continuation of Online module change 1 online module in execution change Cancellation of online module change execution 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 3 Special relays and special registers related to online module change Indication for online module change is stored into the special relays SM235 SM236 and special register SD235 By monitoring SM235 SM236 and SD235 shows the status for online module change e SM235 Online module change flag Holds ON during online module change e SM236 Flag that turns ON only one scan after online module change Turns ON only one scan after the online module change finished e SD235 Module being changed online The head I O address of module being changed online 10H is stored Refer to Section 11 6 for details of SM235 and SM236 and Section 11 7 for details of SD235 Online module change start Online module change finished SM235 OFF SD235 N The head I O address of changed module 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 Online module change procedure The online module change procedure for an I O module is explained here Please refer to the intelligent function module s manual about its online module change pr
191. loper 5 6 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer 5 7 Examples of I O Number Assignment 5 8 Checking the I O Numbers 6 PROCESS CPU FILES 6 1 About the Process CPU s Memory 6 2 Program Memory 6 3 About the Standard ROM 6 4 About the Standard RAM 6 5 Memory Card 6 6 Writing Data to the Standard ROM or the Flash Card 6 6 1 Writing Data to the standard ROM or to the Flash card using the GX Developer 6 6 2 Automatic write to standard ROM Auto Download all Data from Memory card to standard ROM 6 7 Executing Standard ROM Memory Card Programs Boot Run 6 8 Program File Configuration 6 9 GX Developer File Operation and File Handling Precautions 6 9 1 File operation 6 9 2 File handling precautions 6 9 3 File size 7 FUNCTION 7 1 Function List 7 2 Constant Scan 7 3 Latch Functions 7 4 Setting the Output Y Status when Changing from to STOP Status to from RUN Status 7 5 Clock Function 7 6 Remote Operation 7 6 1 Remote RUN STOP 7 6 2 Remote PAUSE 7 6 3 Remote RESET 7 6 4 Remote latch clear 7 6 5 Relationship of the remote operation and Process CPU RUN STOP switch 7 7 Changing the Input Response Speed of the Q Series Compatible Module I O Response Time 7 7 1 Selecting the response time of the input module 7 7 2 Selecting the response time of the high speed input module 7 7 3 Selecting the response time of the interrupt module 7 8 Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module 7 9 Monitoring Function 7 9 1 Monitor condi
192. ly DC For example if the external power supply for the controlled object is switched on in a DC output module and then the PLC power supply is switched on the DC output module may provide false output instantaneously at power on of the PLC Therefore it is necessary to make up a circuit that can switch on the PLC power supply first Also an abnormal operation may be performed if an external power supply fault or PLC failure takes place To prevent any of these abnormal operations from leading to the abnormal operation of the whole system and in a fail safe viewpoint areas which can result in machine breakdown and accidents due to abnormal operations e g emergency stop protective and interlock circuits should be constructed outside the PLC The following page gives examples of system designing in the above viewpoint 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 1 System design circuit example when not using ERR contact of power supply module POWER SUPPLY power FOR AC FOR AC DC SUPPLY Q Input switched 000 when power AF TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER p any supply j FUSE 2 j n FUSE established CPU MODULE uae GL L SM52 i Hm _o D RUN STOP circuit 1SM403 SM403 interlocked with RA1 Yn run monitor relay XM FUSE 144 a o Set time ee power supply to
193. m configuration A from the main base unit Reset the High Performance model QCPU and run it again If the 7003 There is no response from the target station in a multiple CPU same error is displayed again it is a hardware fault of any PLC aia at initial communication stage Consult your sales representative 1 Faulty CPU module is loaded in a multiple CPU system 2 High Performance model QCPU of inion version A is loaded 1 Read the individual error information using GX Developer and in a multiple CPU system configuration replace the CPU module of the faulty machine An error is detected at the High Performance model QCPU of 2 Change the station of function version A for function version B function version B 3 Do not reset the CPU modules of stations 2 to 4 Reset the 3 In a multiple CPU system any of stations 2 to 4 was reset during Process CPU High Performance model QCPU of station 1 and power on restart the multi CPU system This error occurs at only the station which was reset In a multiple CPU system a PLC fault occurred at a station where all station stop by stop error of PLC was not selected in the operation mode The error is detected at the Process CPU High Performance model QCPU of other than the station where the PLC fault occurred Read the error individual information at a GX Developer and check 9000 Annunciator F was set ON the program corresponding to the numerical value annunciator number Read the error i
194. m the initial step of the block where the start request is made e When this relay is ON execution starts from the execution block and execution step that were active at stop of SFC program ON is enabled only when resumptive start has been designated at parameters SM902 is not automatically designated for latch e When this relay is OFF transition to one scan one step occurs in all blocks e When this relay is ON transition to one continuous scan occurs in all blocks In designation of individual blocks priority is given to the continuous transition bit of the block Designation is checked when block starts When continuous transition is effective goes ON when continuous transition is not being executed goes OFF when continuous transition is being executed e Normally ON when continuous transition is not effective When block stops selects active step operation output When this relay is OFF all coil outputs are set to OFF e When this relay is ON coil outputs are maintained designate designate When Set m9 0O LIL S Status change ial ial S S Initial U S Initial U k S Instruction M9104 execution S Initial U M9101 format change M9102 format change M9196 MELSEC Q 11 45 11 TROUBLESHOOTING SFC device clear mode Output during end step execution Operation mode for low speed execution type program Access execution flag 11 4
195. matically to the LOCK position when the battery holder is removed In its position insert the battery holder firmly 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directive has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directive has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products 8 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference emissions and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference immunity The applicable products are requested to meet these requirements The sections 8 1 1 through 8 1 5 summarize the precautions on conformance to the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed using the MELSEC Q series PLCs The details of these precautions has been prepared based on the control requirements and the applicable standards control However we will not assure that the overall machinery manufactured according to these details conforms to the above mentioned directives The method of confo
196. mon error information at a GX Developer check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem 4004 The extension instruction designated by the program a device which cannot be used 4010 There is no END FEND instruction in the program 4020 The total number of internal file pointers used by the program exceeds the number of internal file pointers set in the parameters Read the common error information at a GX Developer check error PE step corresponding to its numerical value program error location 4021 The common pointer numbers used by individual files overlap and correct the problem 4030 The allocation pointer numbers used by individual files are overlap The instruction cannot process the contained data The designated device number for data processed by the instruction Read the common error information at a GX Developer check error exceeds the usable range step corresponding to its numerical value program error location Alternatively the stored data or constants for the devices and correct the problem designated by the instruction exceeds the usable range 1 Delete from the program the link direct device which specifies In a multiple CPU system the link direct device JL GL was the network module under control of another station specified for the network module under control of another station 2 Using the link direct device specify the network module under c
197. mory card into the memory card loading connector After loading check for lifting Lifting can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Completely turn off the external power supply before loading or unloading the module Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product Note that online module change can be made when the QnPHCPU is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed online and each module has a predetermined changing procedure For details refer to the section of online module change in this manual Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or placing wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work be sure that the module s terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation When wiring in the PLC be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product
198. ms unit Current scan time us unit Minimum scan time ms unit Minimum scan time us unit Maximum scan time ms unit Maximum scan time us unit END processing time ms unit END processing time us unit Special Register List Explanation Program number of program currently being executed is stored as BIN value Program number of low speed program currently being executed is stored as BIN value e Enabled only when SM510 is ON Current scan time is stored into SD520 SD521 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD520 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD521 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Example Current scan time 23 6ms is stored as indicated below SD520 23 SD521 600 Scan time of initial execution program is stored into SD522 SD523 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD522 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD523 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 e Minimum value of scan time with the exception of initial execution program scan time is stored into SD524 SD525 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD524 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD525 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Maximum value of scan time with the exception of initial execution program scan time is stored into SD526 SD527 Measurement is made in 100us increments SD526 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to
199. n gt oO o 11 74 11 74 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 6 Instruction Related Registers e Corresponding Correspondin Number Nam Meaning Explanation ACPU p 3 During block operations turning SM705 ON makes it possible to use Mask pattern Mask pattern the mask pattern being stored at SD705 or at SD 09 and SD706 i double words are being used to operate on all data in the block with the masked values Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the following manner B15 B1 BO instruction Mask pattern D715 115 11 10 mask pattern SD716 131 117 116 SD717 147 133 132 e For use as replacement for accumulators used in A series programs Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction SD738 2nd character B15 to B8 B7 to BO 1st character SD739 4th character 3rd character SD740 6th character 5th character SD741 8th character 7th character SD742 10th character 9th character SD743 12th character 11th character S During execution Sre SD744 14th character 13th character SD745 16th character 15th character SD746 18th character 17th character SD747 20th character 19th character SD748 22nd character 21st character SD749 24th character 23rd character SD750 26th character 25th charact
200. n 1 Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 Alowable momentary power failure Within 20ms period 3 Dielectric withstand voltade Across inputs LG and outputs FG F 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft i Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs and LG FG across outputs Insulation resistance and FG LG 10M9 or more by insulation resistance tester 100 to 120VAC 200 to 240VAC Input power supply e By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise Noise durability frequency e Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV Operation indication LED indication lit at 5VDC output Built in Unchangeable by user Apbiication ERR contact contact switched off opened normally closed contact at an error stop of CPU pP module for CPU module operating status output Rated switching voltage 24VDC 0 5A current ee Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA outpu p OFF to ON 10ms max ON to OFF 12ms max section Lif Mechanical More than 2 million times ife Electrical More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage current No Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 to 3 5 RAV2 to 3 5 Applicable tightening torque 66 to 89Necm 98mm 3 86inch External 7 55 2mm 2 33inch b oo 115mm 4 53inch 0 40kg dimensions 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q POINTS 1 Overcurrent protection The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5 V 24 V
201. n SM1052 is ON the SEG instruction is executed as an I O partial refresh instruction When SM1052 is OFF the SEG instruction is executed as a 7 SEG display instruction ON STEP RUN in effect position ON Completed reset instruction Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete e Turned ON once when the P set has been completed and then turned OFF again Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete 11 53 11 TROUBLESHOOTING ACPU Special Rela Special Special Relay after Relay for Conversion Modification SM1061 lt s Sub program 3 P eas set request Divided SM1065 SM711 processing execution detection Divided SM1066 SM712 processing request flag Sy A8UPU A8PUJre SM1070 quired search or time SM1081 w Xe SM1091 J Instruction error flag SM1094 Presence absenc SM1100 SM320 e of SFC program smitot sm321 Startstop SFC program SFC program start status Presence absenc SM1103 SM323 e of continuous transition Communication request registration area BUSY signal VO change flag SM1102 M9103 y M9061 M9065 M9066 M9070 M9081 M9084 M9091 M9094 M9100
202. n on the following page 11 38 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Input Circuit Problems and Corrective Actions Continued Condition Cause Corrective Action e Sneak path due to the use of two power e Use only one power supply supplies Connect a sneak path prevention diode Input signal Figure below does not Input modul turn OFF rr 1O 2 a E o x lt W Input module Change response time setting Example ims 5ms Setting of a shorter response time may produce a higher effect on periodic excessive noise If no Depending on response time setting noise is effects are produced by the above take basic imported as input actions to prevent excessive noise form entering e g avoid bundling the power and I O cables and suppress noise by adding surge absorbers to such noise sources as relays and conductors used with the same power supply False input due to noise Example 6 11 39 11 39 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q lt Calculation example of Example 4 gt QX40 Leakage current 2 33mA If a switch with an LED display is connected to QX40 and a current of 2 33 mA is leaked Input module 4 7KQ 24VDC Voltage Vtg across the terminal and common base is VTB 2 33 MA lt 5 6 kQ 13 V Ignore the voltage drop caused by the LED Because the condition for the OFF voltage S11 V is not satisfied the input does not turn off To correct this con
203. nUMbErONINE Me Gek registratigng Reduce the number of registrations to 16 or less exceeds 16 40644 Online error the parameter Or check the data A keyword that differs from the keyword set in 7 the specified driver memory has been specified 4067H The specified monitor file cannot be obtained Conduct monitor after obtaining the monitor file BEC allony Gyn cannotbe conducted Reexecute the command after the request from the 4068H because the specified command is being other equipment has been completed executed 4069 The conditions have already been reached by Check the monitor conditions i the device match Or reconduct monitor registration and execute monitor 406AH pea than Nos T103 nas been Check the specified drive and specify the correct drive PY Naa e Program before correction and the registration Check the registration program and make the programs 40707 Circuit inquiry program differ match 40804 heck the requested data contents Other errors 4066H Check the specified keyword 4081H The sort subject cannot be detected Check the data to be searched The specified command is executing and Reexecute the command after the request from the 4082H therefore cannot be executed other equipment is completed Trying a execute a progra n that is not Register the program to be executed in the parameter registered in the parameter 4083H App 4 App 4 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Countermeasure Error code E
204. nally set when OFF CHK priorities updated when ON ON when El instruction is being executed Switches ON for only one scan when COMRD or PRC instruction is completed Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the S FWRITE S FREAD COMRD PRC or LEDC instruction Turned ON when OPERATION ERROR is suppressed for BIN or DBIN instruction ON when PKEY instruction is being executed Goes OFF when CR is input or when input character string reaches 32 characters Goes ON when keyboard input is being conducted Goes when keyboard input has been stored at the CPU module Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed Selects whether only the general data process is performed for the execution of the COM instruction or the link refresh process is also performed Determines whether to enable disable the local device in the program CALLED at CALL Determines whether to enable disable the local device at the execution of interrupt programs When Set Instruction execution Instruction execution Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Status change S Status change S Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Instruction execution U Status change U Status change MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 7 Debug Number Name Meaning Explanation When Set petal name tie 1 wooo __ OFF Not ready rewi Por S Status S
205. nate the error cause after confirming it The USER LED can be turned off by e Making a reset with the RESET L CLR switch or e Executing the LEDR instruction in the sequence program When the RESET L CLR switch is tilted to L CLR several times for latch clear operation the USER LED flickers to indicate that the latch clear processing is under operation When the RESET L CLR switch is further tilted to L CLR while the USER LED flickers the USER LED turns off and terminates the latch clear processing 11 2 9 When the BAT LED is turned on If the BAT LED turns on follow the steps described below The BAT LED turns on when a low battery capacity is detected If the BAT LED is on monitor the special relays and special registers in the monitor mode of GX Developer to check which of the CPU module and SRAM card batteries was lowered in capacity SM51 to SM52 SD51 to SD52 After confirmation replace the battery with a new one and reset the CPU module with the RESET L CLR switch or run the LEDR instruction and the BAT LED will turns off 11 8 11 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 10 Flowchart for when the BOOT LED is flickering 11 9 MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the BOOT LED of the CPU module flickers at PLC power on at operation start or during operation BOOT LED flickering Power off the PLC Remove the memory card Move the DIP swit
206. nce instruction MOV DO D1 0 102 us oT 415 Total number of instructions ah ara tats A ornu excluding intelligent function module dedicated instructions Fo Constant scan Function for setting the scan timer to fixed 0 5 to 2000 ms configurable in increments of 0 5 ms settings Set parameter values to specify Program 2 Program memory 124k step 252k step capacity Drive 0 Memory card RAM For memory capacity Drive 1 Capacity of loading memory cards 2Mbyte max s e Section 7 1 Memory card ROM Installed memory card capacity For memory capacity Drive 2 Flash card 4 Mbyte max ATA card 32 Mbyte max see Section 7 1 aa RAM ser ROM 1 kl 252 4 Do ee 3 Memory card RAM HC Flashcard Cd Standard RAM 2 Only one file register and one local device Standard ROM Ne Standard ROM number of writings Max 100000 times FT 1 124 is the maximum number of programs that can be executed on Process CPU 125 or more programs are not available 2 The maximum number of sequence steps for one program for which the parameters are stored in another drive and executed with the Process CPU can be calculated with the following expression Program size File header size default 34 steps Refer to the Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for details on the program size and file x3 The CPU shared memory is not latched The CPU shared memory is cleared when the pow
207. nced ventilation and ease of module replacement leave the following clearances between the module top bottom and structure parts Indicates the panel top wiring duct or any part position 7 a Y ee T crmeext 7 E tE le Door 20mm 0 79 inch or more 3 i i Y Eo TU UY y y y y YY y 7 Y or more kK I 5mm 0 20 inch or more 2 5mm 0 20 inch or more 1 For wiring duct 50mm 1 97 inch or less height 40mm 1 58 inch or more for other cases x2 5mm 0 20 inch or more when the adjacent module is removed and the extension cable is connected x3 80mm 3 15 inch or more for the connector type 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 3 MELSEC Q Module mounting orientation a Since the PLC generates heat it should be mounted on a well ventilated location in the orientation shown below Vertical Flat Installation surface Mount the base unit on a flat surface If the mounting surface is not even this may strain the printed circuit boards and cause malfunctions Installation of unit in an area where the other devices are installed Avoid mounting base unit in proximity to vibration sources such as large magnetic contractors and no fuse circuit breakers mount these on a separate panel or at a distance Distances from the other devices In order to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat provide the clearances indicated below between
208. ndex 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by
209. ndividual information at a GX Developer and check 9010 Error detected by the CHK instruction the program corresponding to the numerical value error number there Set the parameter enable drive to standard ROM switch power on Read the individual information of the error check the error of the PLC resulting in PLC fault and remove the error Storage of data onto ROM was completed normally in automatic BOOT TED digo fikas again and perform boot operation from standard ROM 10000 In the multiple CPU ee an error occurred in the CPU module Use the software package of the corresponding CPU module to other than the Process CPU High Performance model QCPU check the details of the error that occurred x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 36 11 36 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 4 Canceling of Errors The Process CPU can perform the cancel operation for errors only when the errors allow the CPU module to continue its operation To cancel the errors follow the steps shown below 1 Eliminate the cause of the error 2 Store the error code to be canceled in the special register SD50 3 Energize the special relay SM50 OFF gt ON 4 The error to be canceled is canceled After the CPU module is reset by the canceling of the error the special relays special registers and LEDs associated with the error are returned to the status under w
210. ne module change Turns ON for one scan after online module change is ON only one incomplete complete scan after online JON Online module change This contact point can only be used by the scan A change is module change complete program for local unit complete Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 1 is canceled No 1 CPU reset PLC No 1 reset cancel Comes ON when the PLC No 1 is resetting including flag PLC No 1 resetting the case where the PLC is removed from the base unit The other PLCs are also put in reset status Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 2 is canceled No 2 CPU reset PLC No 2 reset cancel Comes ON when the PLC No 2 is resetting including flag PLC No 2 resetting the case where the PLC is removed from the base unit The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 3 is canceled No 3 CPU reset PLC No 3 reset cancel Comes ON when the PLC No 3 is resetting including flag PLC No 3 resetting the case where the PLC 8 removed from the base unit The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 4 is canceled S Status Comes ON when the PLC No 4 is resetting includin NOP OP RIESE PLO NO 4 ragot c ngel the case where the PLC is removed from a base n change New New New fag REG No Lresetting The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 LC No 1 normal Goes OFF when t
211. nect a resistor as shown below QX40 Input impedance 5 6kQ itti Calculation of current for resistor R The voltage of QX40 across the terminals must be reduced to 11 V or less The required current is 24 11 V 4 7 kQ 2 77 mA Therefore resistor R of flowing current of 2 77 mA or more must be connected Calculation of resistance of connected resistor R 11 V R gt 2 77 mA T 11 V R gt 2 77 1 96 mA 11 V 0 81 mA gt R 13 6 kQ gt R Resistance of the connected resistor R is obtained in the above equations Suppose that the resistance R is 12 k9 The power capacity W of the resistor during activation of the switch is W Applied voltage R W 28 8 V f 12 k9 0 069 W Because the resistance is selected so that the power capacity is three to five times the actual power consumption a third to a half W should be selected In this case a resistor of 12 k9 and a third to a half W should be connected across the terminal and COM 11 40 11 40 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 5 2 Output Circuit Troubleshooting This section explains trouble examples and troubleshooting methods in the output circuit Output Circuit Troubleshooting Z Condition _ When load is half wave rectified inside e Connect a resistor of several ten KQ to several This is typical of some solenoids hundred KQ across the load QY22 Output module Resistor Excessive voltage i
212. ng station error ZNWR execution disabled ZNWR cannot be executed in the corresponding station One of the stations is not communicating The specified station is a remote I O station Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET II e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become 1 Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected become 0 Device number Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Bit b8 b7 L9 L8 L25 L24 L41 L40 L57 L56 b14 L15 L31 L47 L63 b13 L14 L30 L46 L62 b12 L13 L29 L45 L61 b11 L12 L28 Lad L60 b10 L11 L27 L43 L59 b9 L10 L26 L42 L58 b6 L7 L23 L39 L55 b5 L6 L22 L38 L54 b4 L5 L21 L37 L53 b2 L3 t19 L35 L51 If a local station goes down during the operation contents before going down are retained Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to D1231 are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the special register above becomes valid If the own master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained D1202 D1203 D1241 SD1242 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Forward loop during data link Reverse loop during data link Loopback implemented in forward reverse directions Loopback implemented only in forward directi
213. nnunciator Intelligent function number CHK module parameter instruction error malfunction for QCPU only number Number Meaning Number Meaning Number Meaning SD16 Parameter No 5 SD16 No SD16 Parameter No 5 SD17 SD17 SD17 Error code for intelligent SD18 SD18 function module SD19 SD19 SD18 SD20 SD20 SD19 SD21 SD21 SD20 5D22 Vacant 5D22 Vacant S21 SD23 SD23 SD22 Vacant SD24 SD24 SD23 SD25 SD25 SD24 SD26 SD26 SD25 SD26 x5 For details of the parameter numbers refer to the user s manual of the CPU module used n n n n n n n n n n n g S g g S 9 9 9 z 8 ol A wo N _ Oo o N o 11 62 11 62 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Set b Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When a ACPU Si ing pI T Error code that All corresponding bits go ON when battery voltage drops e Subsequently these remain ON even after battery voltage has been returned to normal B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Bit pattern indicating where CPU error battery voltage drop gt Memory card A alarm New gt Memory card A error occurred gt Memory card B alarm gt Memory card B error When Process CPU is used this flag is always OFF because memory card B is used as standard memory Bit pattern Same configuration as SD51 above indicating where Subsequently goes OFF when battery voltage is restored to SD52 Battery low batter
214. numbers Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below B15 to B12B11 to Priority 4 Priority 3 D208 i Priority6 For details refer to the applicable CPUs User s Manual and the ACPU Programming manual Fundamentals B8 B7 Priority 2 B4B3 to Priority 1 to BO SD207 Priority 7 Priority 5 11 80 11 TROUBLESHOOTING ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Conversion Conversion Modification D1044 D1049 SD1050 D1051 D1052 D9053 SD1053 D9054 SD1054 D9055 SD1055 D9060 SD1060 D1072 D1081 MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Meaning For sampling Step or time during trace sampling trace Extension file SFC program register block No execution work used as SFC area program execution work area Error code generated by SFC program Block number Error block where error occurred Step number where Error step error occurred Transition condition SFC program error number Error transition number where error occurred Sequence step Error sequence number where error ste i occurred Status latch execution step No Status latch execution step No F Software version of Software version internal software PLC Data check of serial communications communication check module Number of empty blocks in communications 0 to 32 request registrtion area Corresponding Detail
215. o Example Minutes 0 to 59 Seconds 0 to 59 35 min 48 sec past the hour H3548 Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being stored in the common information areas SD5 through SD15 and the individual information areas SD16 through SD26 are stored here B15 to B8 B7 to BO Individual information Common information O Rem category codes category codes The common information category codes store the following codes 0 No error Unit module No PLC No Base No File name Drive name Time value set Program error location Error Switch cause for Q4AR only information information x For a multiple CPU system the module number or PLC New categories category code number is stored depending on the error that occurred Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been stored PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 The individual information category codes store the following codes 0 No error 1 Open 2 File name Drive name 3 Time value actually measured 4 Program error location 5 Parameter number 6 Annunciator number 7 Check instruction malfunction number 11 59 11 59 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Corresponding Explanation ACPU bo TT Common information corresponding to the error codes SDO is stored SD5 here The follow
216. o of the 1st module installed IP Ethernet IP address of the 1st module installed Pele oo Ethernet address 3 S information Error od Ethernet error code of the 1st module installed Information from 2nd module Initial n EH Configuration is identical to that for the first module o Ke2 Information from 3rd module Configuration is identical to that for the first module NIN Information from 4th module e Configuration is identical to that for the first module 11 69 11 69 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation Retain ACPU Corresponding p T The software version is stored 7 in the lower byte position Higher byte Lower byte The data in the higher byte Software Internal system position is indefinite version software version For version A for example 41H is stored Note The internal system software version may differ from the version indicated by the version symbol printed on the case Multiple Ina multiple CPU system configuration the PLC number of the CPU Multiple CPU number host CPU is stored S Initial New number PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 3 System clocks counters Corresponding Set by Corresponding N N M Expl umber ame leaning xplanation When set ACP
217. o read a program x Proceed to Section 11 2 14 Unable to write a program Flowchart for when unable to write a program Unable to perform boot operation ee to pase cE mib ON memory car owchart for when unable to perform boot operation from memory card Proceed to Section 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs CONTROL BUS ERR occurs Proceed to Section 11 2 17 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR occurs 11 2 11 2 I O module not operating properly Unable to read a program UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 2 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is not turned on The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the MODE LED of the CPU module does not turn on at PLC power on MODE LED is not turned on Is the power supply for all the power supply modules turned on Is the wiring of the power supply module correct NO Check the wire and turn on the power supply Can MODE LED be turned on Is the POWER LED for the power supply module turned on Exchange the power supply module and confirm if POWER LED is turned on Can MODE LED be turned on Is the extension cable connected properly Isn t IN connected to IN or OUT connected to OUT NO Connect the extension cable properly YES NO Can MODE LED YES be t
218. ocedure POINT It is recommended to turn OFF the output Y from the output or I O mixed module before its on line change a Click Diagnosis Online module change on GX Developer to select the Online module change mode System Monitor x Installed status 5 Bas 1 2 3 4 ey Module en ean es J Main base QY41 Unmo Unmo Unmo P untijuntijunti 3Zpting jng jng Q1ZPHCPU r Parameter status E ef Inpul bigs None None None Q1LZPHCPU t 16pt bea 16pt 1 6pt 1 pt Status E Module system error Module error g Module warning o Module change Close 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULE MELSEC Q b Double click the module to be changed online to display the Online module change screen The following table indicates the status of communication with the module changed online when the following screen is being displayed Kedisi Executed Operation p Target module arget Module Item Not Executed Module change execution 1 0 address O10H Input module refresh Executed A SDN Module name Qv41P Installation confirmation Output module refresh Executed Stat Module control restart nae O mixed module Change module selection completed Input refresh Executed Status Guidance SS Output refresh Executed Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the Intelli g ent function modul
219. ocessing S Every END processing S Status change S Status change M9034 format change S Status change S Status change S Every END processing S Every END processing 11 47 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 4 Scan information aad 2 Low speed exection type OFF in LERON Goes ON when low speed execution type program is ON Execution under way executed processing Reads the module service interval designated by SD550 to SD551 and SD552 when this relay switches from OFF to ON Reads module OFF Ignored service interval ON Read 5 Memory cards Memory card OFF Unusable A f l SM600 usable flags ON Use enabled ON when memory card is ready for use by user S Initial SM601 Memory card OER No protect Goes ON when memory card protect switch is ON S Initial protect flag ON Protect i seg No dived Goes ON when loaded memory card is RAM S Initial ON Drive 1 present g OFF No drive 2 Diveztes ON Drive 2 present Goes ON when loaded memory card is ROM S Initial Memory carg OFF Notin us Goes ON when memory card is in use Initia in use flag ON In use Memory card OFF Remove insert enabled remove insert ON Remove insert prohibit flag prohibited S Memory card OFF Remove insert Sls D user to enable the removal insertion of remove insert prohibited Y i Inti nit Initi Inti nit U Turned OFF by the system after t
220. ocessing has ended execution processing Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Check the setting contents and make a correction d Check the setting contents and make a correction Check the number of registrations and make a correction 5 5 D O D B B12 Slo 3S 39 Ae 318 SQ 318 AQ 3 3 Sis 3 1 38 ss 3 2 3 a DILIO SIF OIA DIA O15 DIS oO O13 0 2 2 af 0 9 2 o D oO Oo o OIF A 2jo 2 ajz a O B 0 0 ajg 0 0 38 oll a a 5o oligo 3 gt 5 gt gt 2 gt gt gt S gt 2 gt 2 2 SIR D z 3 2X O10 O10 Ojo GIF OIS O F OF olL FIP O B z 3 D zjo 3 la e fe fe 2Olo ole a 2 ZIS 218 2 8 2 ale o ojc 2 5 oje 2 ola Op SIS lS 6 8 xB x xlG x xip xX xo x15 ols gt w Dllo I8 O18 O18 2 3 oo o 3 x 3 o 2lS 2 sie 2 2 2j o oje 2j GJS O 5 2 gja 2 D 5 2 98 alas Sle Sla Sla Sic S Sido Silo Sj SIF amp SIS 2 g 2 Elele Sle Tf OP GIS j9 T 0 9 O12 O19 O13 S j3 z 2 lt 3lale v jo G v via M19 vja O19 Z lg D lt oln o al alo s o a 5 aJo aI L Bi L Q D oO ao D D j2 5 2 5 2ja 29 5 O 5 A n Qis 2 gt a Ra 2 2 ja 2 algal ajas 3 SA Q olg amp Cc a cjo cS c cS c e pS gt E gt D ot oO oO O12 o D oO D D D D 3
221. ock being executed when the program stopped Once turned on the program is latched in the system and remains on even if the power is turned off Should be turned off by the sequence program when turning on the power or when starting with the initial step of block 0 Selects consecutive or step by step transfer of steps of which transfer conditions are established when all of the transfer conditions of consecutive steps are established ON Consecutive transfer is executed OFF One step per one scan is transferred 11 54 11 TROUBLESHOOTING ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Conversion Modification Continuous SM1104 SM324 transition suspension Step transition sM1108 SM90 Watondog imer start equivalent of D9108 Step transition SM1109 SM91 Watchdog sine start equivalent of D9109 Step transition SM1110 SM92 Watchdog timer start equivalent of D9110 Step transition SM1111 SM93 Watchdog timer start equivalent of D9111 Step transition SM1112 SM94 Watchdog timer start equivalent of D9112 Step transition SM11143 SM95 Watchdog imer start equivalent of D9113 Step transition SM11144 SM9 watchdog timer start equivalent of D9114 Active step sampling trace completion flag Active step SM1181 SM822 sampling trace execution flag Active step SM1182 SM821 sampling trace permission SM1196 SM325 Operation output at block stop M1197 3 2 Switch between blown fuse and
222. of settings and make a correction specified A sequence step No outside the range was specified he specified device was outside the range There is a mistake in the block specification Check the setting contents and make a correction Check the number of settings and make a correction Check the setting contents and make a correction he wrong drive was specified he specified program does not exist The specified program was not an SFC program heck the setting contents and make a correction heck the specified file name and make a correction Check the specified file name and make a correction i Check the setting contents and make a correction write during run area Execute the request again after resetting the CPU module D oF ale 3 sis I gt 218 alg 2 3 0 oO Q 5 zeas 2 g olg ole 2 o 5 2 v s 2 a S ale 3 2 a Qyec v s n o ojo 3 au ks Uso O D Cla amp 2 LB gt 3B g 2 3 ng Sigal Q Eos D 3 Clo O ola 2 2 D gt ow Q D o Q fa 2 gt Q 3 5 Ez D a o Kel lt xo x fav o 6 c D e Q foj pas fa a 5 3 D 2 9 fe z 5 v a as S D 5S 8j L lt 8 5 a 8 n Execute the request again after the other CPU modules up the CPU module cannot execute the have started up request Increase the free space of the specified drive The route directory has no free space Optimize the specified drive to increase continuous free areas pecify t
223. of the Q series CC Link module under control of another station Change the setting to the first I O number of the Q series CC Link module under control of the host station Write after correcting network parameters If the error persists after corrections have been made contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Change the file register file for the one refresh enabled in the whole range Check the parameter setting The contents of the CC Link parameter are incorrect Check the parameter setting Write after correcting parameters O 11 30 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LEDStatus Operating PR SD ae Error Messages Information Information LED Statys Statuses of Diagnostic Timing i 1 1 ERROR CPU When an END instruction is 3301 executed i At power ON Reset SP PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off Flicker Stop STOP gt RUN 3302 At power ON Reset STOP RUN 3303 SP PARA ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Off roe om fe 3400 REMOTE PASS At power ON Reset ERROR Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN 3401 l Hi 4000 2 4001 INSTRCT CODE ERR Program error location 4002 4003 4004 INSTRCT CODE ERR Program error location 4010 MISSING END INS At power ON Reset Flicker Stop SOR Reh 4020 4021 4100 ff Off CAN T SET P Program error location Off 1 Off Program error location Program Pro
224. ojojojojojojojofjo D1107 9 O47 9 9 9 0 0 0 0 B0 T iia fuse blow e Fuse blow check is executed also to module of remote I O station If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program he ou e Sets value for the step transfer monitoring timer and the number of F which turns on when the monitoring timer timed out b15 to b amp b7 to bO Timer setting 1 to 255 s in seconds F number setting By turning on any of SM1108 to SM1114 the monitoring timer starts If the transfer condition following a step which corresponds to the timer is not established within set time set annunciator F is tuned on When I O modules of which data are different from those entered at power on have been detected the V O unit numbers in units of 16 points are entered in bit pattern Preset I O unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 D1116 0 0 0 0 0 Oo o0 0 0 D1117 0 0 0 0 0jojojo AANA D1123 0 0 EAR ojojojo B0 YARRA Cee 1 0 module verify error e I O module verify check is executed also to remote I O station modules If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program 11 82 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q
225. om Memory card to Standard ROM Set the Transfer from to Standard ROM r Boot file setting Progam Type Dataname Transfer from J Transferto MAIN Device com ee Program memory COMME 3 Comment COMMENT Standard ROM v Program memory Parameter A owt CT Insert Delete Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Default Check End Cancel 2 Store the set parameters and programs to be booted in the memory card 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q b Operations with CPU module automatic write to standard ROM 1 Switch OFF the power supply to the PLC 2 Mount the memory card that contains the parameters and programs to be booted onto the CPU module 3 Set the parameter s valid drive in the mounted memory card with the CPU module s dip switches e When a SRAM card is mounted SW2 ON SW3 OFF e When a Flash card ATA card is mounted SW2 OFF SW3 ON 4 Switch ON the power supply to the PLC 5 BOOT LED will flicker when automatic write to standard ROM has been completed and the CPU module will assume a suspension error status 6 Switch OFF the power supply to the PLC 7 Remove the memory card and then set the parameter s valid drive in the standard ROM with the CPU module s dip switches e Standard ROM SW2 ON SW3 ON c The parameters and programs will be booted from the standard ROM to the
226. on Loopback implemented only inreverse direction Data link disabled Stores the present path status of the data link e Data link in forward loop Master station Forward loop e Data link in reverse loop Reverse loop 5 Forward loop Reverse loop 11 84 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification e Loopback in forward reverse loops 0 Forward loop i ester i i during data link Feces cane 1 Reverse loop eins during data link rg 2 Loopback Forward loopback Reverse loopback implemented in e Loopback in forward loop only forward reverse gt Station 3 station n D9204 SD1204 Link status doctors i i i 3 Loopback teens tol los implemented only S52 So Bee pita in forward Forward loopback direction Loopback in reverse loop only 4 Loopback implemented only i inreverse direction Data link disabled tie knit be Reverse loopback Stores the local or remote I O station number at which loopback is being executed Station Station that D1205 implementing implemented forward i A gt loopback loopback IL Wie EE eet Se et ee ed lt a Forward loopback Reverse loopback In the example of above figure 1 is stored into Station Station that D1205 and 3 into SD1206 If data link returns to D1206 implementing implemented reverse normal status
227. on Since data are all set to these special registers on the system side the user cannot turn them ON OFF in a program When it is desired to set data on the user side correct the program to use the special registers for Q QnA For SD1200 SD1255 however the user can set data to only the special registers among SD1200 SD1255 after conversion that correspond to those where the user could set data among D9200 D9255 before conversion For more detailed information concerning the contents of the ACPU special registers see the individual CPU User s Manual and the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link system reference manual Supplemental explanation on Special Register for Modification column For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is specified modify it to the special register for Process CPU For the device numbers for which is specified special register after conversion can be used Device numbers for which Xx is specified do not function for QCPU QnACPU Special Register List Special Special Gonessendin Register after Register for Name Meaning Details sh g Conversion Modification When fuse blown modules are detected the lowest number of detected units is stored in hexadecimal Example When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown 50 is stored in hexadecimal Number of p i To monitor the number by peripheral devices perform Fuse blown module with
228. on is complete at the local station On indicates that the ZNWR instruction is complete at the local station Host station link OFF Normal Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of parameter error ON Abnormal the host is valid Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of the master station in tier two matches that of the master station in tier three in a three tier system Valid only for the master stations in a three tier system Depends on whether or not the B and W data controlled by higher link master station host station is sent to lower link local stations tertiary stations When SM1208 is OFF B and W of host station is sent to tertiary stations B and W of host station is not sent to tertiary stations Set to ON not to match B and W of the higher and lower links When SM1209 is ON the link parameters of the higher and lower links are not checked When SM1209 is OFF the link parameters of the higher and lower links are checked QnA e When SM1208 is ON M9210 SM1210 Link card error for OFF Normal Depends on presence or absence of the link card master station ON Abnormal hardware error Judged by the CPU Link module error M9211 SM1211 for local station use M9224 SM1224 j Link status OFF Normal ON Abnormal OFF Online ON Offline station to station test or self loopback test Depends on presence or absence of the link card hardware erro
229. on of an EMI gasket on the paint surface Our tests have been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37 dB max and 30 dB mean measured by 3 m method with 30 to 300 MHz 2 Connection of power and earth wires Earthing and power supply wires for the PLC system must be connected as described below a Provide an earthing point near the power supply module Earth the power supply s LG and FG terminals LG Line Ground FG Frame Ground with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30 cm 11 81 inch or shorter The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the PLC system to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna b The earth wire led from the earthing point must be twisted with the power supply wires By twisting with the earthing wire noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the earthing However if a filter is installed on the power supply wires the wires and the earthing wire may not need to be twisted 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 1 3 Cables MELSEC Q The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise component On the outside of the control panel therefore they serve as antennas to emit noise To
230. ons 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS 4 1 Sequence Program 4 1 1 Main routine program 4 1 2 Sub routine programs 4 1 3 Interrupt programs 4 2 Program Execute Type 4 2 1 Initial execution type program 4 2 2 Scan execution type program 4 2 3 Low speed execution type program 4 2 4 Stand by type program 4 2 5 Fixed scan execution type program 4 3 Operation processing 4 3 1 Initial processing 4 3 2 I O refresh I O module refresh processing 4 3 3 Automatic refresh of the intelligent function module 4 3 4 END processing 4 4 RUN STOP PAUSE Operation Processing 4 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure 4 6 Data Clear Processing 4 7 O Processing and Response Lag 4 7 1 Refresh mode 4 7 2 Direct mode 4 8 Numeric Values which Can Be Used in Sequence Programs 4 8 1 BIN Binary code 4 8 2 HEX Hexadecimal 4 8 3 BCD Binary Coded Decimal A 10 A 10 4 8 4 Real numbers floating decimal point data 4 9 Character String Data 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS 5 1 Relationship Between the Number of Stages and Slots of the Extension Base Unit 5 2 Installing Extension Base Units and Setting the Number of Stages 5 3 Base Unit Assignment Base Mode 5 4 What are I O Numbers 5 5 Concept of I O Number Assignment 5 5 1 I O numbers of main base unit and extension base units 5 5 2 Remote station I O number 5 6 I O Assignment by GX Developer 5 6 1 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Deve
231. ontrol of the host station The network number and station number designated with a dedicated network instruction are not correct The link direct device J 3 W 1 is not set correctly Read the common error information at a GX Developer check error e The module No network No character string count specified by step corresponding to its numerical value program error location the extension instruction is outside the setting range and correct the problem e The ae string specified by the extension instruction is unusable Using the multiple CPU dedicated instruction completion bit provide 4107 a S High p Multipis GF esi Pt instructions were executed from interlocks to prevent one CPU module from executing 32 or more g multiple CPU dedicated instructions No NEXT instruction was executed following the execution of a Read the common error information at a GX Developer check error FOR instruction i a09 Alternatively there are fewer NEXT instructions than FOR s anyen numerical value program error location instructions A NEXT instruction was executed although no FOR instruction has 480 been executed Read the common error information at a GX Developer check error Alera evs a Tove NEXT TSTOGTOTS Tan FOR Sr ar eod tae sear vaki Dion Ang exten 4202 More than 16 nesting levels are programmed Keep nesting levels at 16 or under Read the common error information at a GX Developer check error 420
232. or in CPU module 1 Measure noise level 2 Reset and establish the RUN status again CPU shared memory fault If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware error Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1200 The circuit that performs CPU internal index modification is not operating properly T201 internal CPU hardware logic does not operate normally This suggests a CPU module hardware error Contact your nearest 1202 The circuit that executes sequence processing in the CPU does not operate properly Mitsubishi representative 1 Check FUSE LED of the output modules and replace the module whose LED is lit 2 The module with a blown fuse can also be checked with a GX Developer Monitor special registers SD1300 to SD1331 and check if there is a bit 1 which corresponds to the module with a blown fuse There is an output module with a blown fuse One of the individual modules is experiencing hardware problems 1310 An interruption has occurred although there is no interrupt module so check the modules Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative and explain the problem with the defective module x 1 Charactel 11 20 o rs in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 20 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual Operating maT DaT Error Messages Information Information r
233. or reverse loop error has occurred Device Bit number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 FIR F RIF L R7 LIR6 FIR F IRF 16 L R15 L R14 FIR F RIF L R22 FlR F RIF L R30 F RIF L R38 F R F R F L R46 FIR F RIF LIR54 FIR FIR F D1232 D1233 D1234 D1235 FIR D1236 D1237 D1238 D1239 In the above table F indicates a forward loop line and R a reverse loop line The bit corresponding to the station number at which the forward or reverse loop error has occurred becomes 1 Example When the forward loop line of station 5 has an error bit 8 of SD1232 become 1 and when D1232 is monitored its value is 256 100 Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have been detected CRC OVER AB IF Count is made to a maximum of FFFFxu RESET to return the count to 0 Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET II e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become 1 e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected become 0 Device Bit number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b1 SD1202 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L2 SD1203 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L18 SD1241 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L34 SD1242 L64 L
234. ores the currently selected file register block number Status D9035 block number block number change Comment Comment Stores the comment drive number selected at the parameters or by S Status New drive drive number the QCDSET instruction change Stores the comment file name selected at the parameters or by the QCDSET instruction in ASCII code with extension B15 to B8 B7 to SD651 Second character First character Comment file Comment file SD652 Fourth character Third character S Status SD653 Sixth character Fifth character change SD654 Eighth character Seventh character SD655 First character of extension 2EH BO Second character of SD656 Third character of extension extension Stores the drive number where the boot designation file QBT is fos j S Initial being stored Boot Stores the file name of the boot designation file QBT to B8 B7 to BO SD661 Second character First character SD662 Fourth character Third character operation designation file SD663 Sixth character Fifth character S Initial SD664 Eighth character Seventh character SD665 First character of extension 2EH Second character of SD666 Third character of extension extension NDININININIOA n HDININININIDA n n OU OUIUIGIQO OU g g igigigjgg g g DIDIAINIAID Q DI DINDIDI AID e2 D DIDIDIRDI QD oD Q Altra at asi ais n a DA OJJA J NJ gt O Iaj AJS T
235. ormed Do not make a request where an error occurred or since online module change is not enabledin make a request again after enabling online module the setting of the multiple CPU setting change in the setting of the multiple CPU setting parameter parameter Do not make a request where an error occurred or make a request again after disabling online module change in the setting of the multiple CPU setting parameter rase the specified drive z S ij D w n The requested processing cannot be performed since online module change is enabled in the setting of the multiple CPU setting parameter The requested processing cannot be performed since an online module change is being performed The specified head I O number is outside the When making a request specify the head I O number of the module that will be changed online Check the command used to make a request Make a request again after completion of the online module change 9 5 a D An online module change request is abnormal App 6 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 3 Make a request again after completion of the online 4212H P eee already being module change or continue after changing the quip i connection path The specified head I O number differs from the 3 When making a request specify the head I O number of 4213H Ade number of the module being changed the module being changed online 42144 The specified module differs from the one Make a req
236. oubles are described below 11 2 1 Troubleshooting flowchart The following shows the contents of the troubles classified into a variety of groups according to the types of events Error occurrence description MODE LED off Proceed to Section 11 2 2 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is not turned on Proceed to Section 11 2 3 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering MODE LED flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned off POWER LED off Proceed to Section 11 2 5 eel Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned off Proceed to Section 11 2 6 BUN Ee fickenng When the RUN LED is flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering ERR LED on flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 8 When the USER LED is turned on USER LED on Proceed to Section 11 2 9 BA SLED o When the BAT LED is turned on Proceed to Section 11 2 10 Flowchart for when the BOOT LED is flickering BOOT LED flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 11 Output module LED not turned on p Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned on Proceed to Section 11 2 12 Flowchart for when output load of output module dose not turn on Proceed to Section 11 2 13 Flowchart for when unable t
237. p the system speedily the cause of the trouble must be located and eliminated correctly The basic three points that must be followed in the troubleshooting are as follows 1 Visual inspection Visually check the following 1 Movement of sequencer stopped condition operating condition 2 Power supply on off 3 Status of input output devices 4 Power supply module CPU module I O module intelligent function module installation condition of extension cable 5 Status of wiring I O cables cables 6 Display status of various types of indicators POWER LED RUN LED ERR LED I O LED 7 Status of setting of various types of set switches Setting of No of stages of extension base unit power interrupt hold on status After confirming items 1 to 7 connect the GX Developer and check the operating conditions of the PLC and the contents of the program 2 Check of trouble Check to see how the operating condition of the PLC varies while the PLC is operated as follows 1 Set the RUN STOP switch to STOP 2 Reset the trouble with the RESET L CLR switch 3 Turn ON and OFF the power supply 3 Reduction in area Estimate the troubled part in accordance with items 1 and 2 above 1 PLC or external devices 2 O module or others 3 Sequence program 11 1 11 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 Troubleshooting The trouble investigating methods contents of troubles for the error codes and remedies of the tr
238. po PPY supply has been D1350 0 olo 1 o o disconnected module disconnected SD1351 olo 0 4 0 External power For future Subply e E a expansion 5 0 a a 3 disconnected Sg ee 1 External power supply is not 1 0 0 0 o o o o ojo disconnected Indicates a blown fuse 11 88 11 88 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue 12 I O module verification Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU ay g e When the power is turned on the module numbers of the I O modules whose information differs from the registered I O module Bit pattern in information are set in this register in units of 16 points units of 16 points If the O numbers are set by parameter the parameter set indicating the numbers are stored ith Also detects I O module information D1405 V O module modules wit 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 4 0 Dr us verification errors D1406 _ verification 0 No VO D9116 olo D1407 _Jerror 7 D1408 verification D9117 o o 1o e errors ANN ANNANN 1 I O verification P9123 x ojo ojo error present t Indicates an O module verification error Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation Jajaj jn jon 3 0 NIN NIN New to New 13 Process control instructions Set by Corresponding Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explana
239. porary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control box equivalent to IP54 in acontrol room or on the floor of a typical factory Pollution level 3 An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level 4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment As shown above the PLC can realize the pollution level 2 when stored in a control box equivalent to IP54 8 7 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 2 5 Grounding MELSEC Q There are the following two different grounding terminals Use either grounding terminal in an earthed status 8 2 6 External wiring 1 Protective grounding Maintains the safety of the PLC and improves the noise resistance Functional grounding L Improves the noise resistance 24VDC external power supply For the MELSEC Q series PLC 24VDC I O modules and the intelligent function modules special function modules which require external supply power use a model whose 24VDC circuit is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the PLC use a model whose circuit section of the interface to the PLC is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit Intensive insulation Intensive in
240. pport online module change parameters is installed 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 28 11 28 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LEDStatus Operating PER Error Code Error Messages Information Information LED Statys Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 x 1 RUN ERROR U SDO x 1 3100 3101 LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number of Flicker Stop Qt power ON Reset 3102 3103 3104 3105 When an END instruction is LINK PARA ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Off Flicker Stop executed 3106 p LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off Flicker Stop 1At power ON mesey 3107 LINK PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off Flicker Siop Noe ON Resey 3200 3201 3202 SFC PARA ERROR File name Parameter number Off Flicker Stop STOP RUN 3203 sno emmo Pene eee OF For Se SSRN 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 29 11 29 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code SDO x 1 In a multiple CPU system the MELSECNET H under control of another station is specified as the first O number in the network setting parameter of the MELSECNET H The network parameters of the MELSECNET H operating in the ordinary station were rewritten to t
241. prevent noise emission use shielded cable for the cables which are connected to the I O modules and intelligent function modules and may be extracted to the outside of the control panel The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance The signal lines connected to the PLC I O modules and intelligent function modules use shielded cables to assure noise resistance under the conditions where the shield is earthed If a shielded cable is not used or not earthed correctly the noise resistance will not meet the specified requirements When the shield of a shielded cable is earthed to the cabinet body please ensure that the shield contact with the body is over a large surface area If the cabinet body is painted it will be necessary to remove paint from the contact area All fastenings must be metallic and the shield and earthing contact must be made over the largest available surface area If the contact surfaces are too uneven for optimal contact to be made either use washers to correct for surface inconsistencies or use an abrasive to level the surfaces The following diagrams show examples of how to provide good surface contact of shield earthing by use of a cable clamp 1 Earthing of shielded of shield cable a Earth the shield of the shielded cable as near the module as possible taking care so that the earthed cables are not induced electromagnetically by the cable to be earthed b Take an appropriate measures so that the shield
242. r Judged by the CPU Depends on whether the master station is online or offline or is in station to station test or self loopback test mode M9225 SM1225 Forward loop error OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line ON Abnormal M9226 SM1226 Reverse loop error OF Hommel Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line ON Abnormal OFF Not being executed M9227 SM1227 Loop test status ON Forward or reverse loop Local station OEE RUN Or sree Depends on whether or not a local station is in STOP or Meee oniiese operation status status PAUSE mode P ON STOP or PAUSE status test execution underway 11 56 Depends on whether or not the master station is executing a forward or a reverse loop test 11 56 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Details Conversion Modification Local station SM1233 error detect status Local station remote I O station parameter error detect status Local station remote I O OFF No communications Depends on the results of initial communication between a station initial ON Communications local or remote I O station and the master station SM1235 communications underway Parameter communication etc SM1236 status Local station OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of a local or remote I O SM1237 remote I O s ON Abnormal station OFF No errors
243. r supply c 100VAC 200VAC and 24VDC wires should be twisted as dense as possible Connect the modules with the shortest distance Also to reduce the voltage drop to the minimum use the thickest wires possible maximum 2mm d Do not bundle the 100VAC and 24VDC wires with or run them close to the main circuit high voltage large current and I O signal lines Reserve a distance of at least 100 mm 3 94 inch from adjacent wires e As a countermeasure to power surge due to lightening connect a surge absorber for lightening as shown below 1 Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightening E1 from that of the PLC E2 2 Select a surge absorber for lightening whose power supply voltage does no exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even at the time of maximum power supply voltage elevation 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 2 2 MELSEC Q 2 Wiring of I O equipment a Insulation sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used with the terminal block It is recommended to cover the wire connections of the crimping terminals with mark or insulation tubes b The wires used for connection to the terminal block should be 0 3 to 0 75mm in core and 2 8mm 0 11 inch max in outside diameter c Run the input and output lines away from each other d When the wiring cannot be run away from the main circuit and power lines use a batch shielded cable and ground it on the PLC side In some cases g
244. r supply module is approx 70 i e 30 of the output power is consumed by heating As a result 3 7 of the output power becomes the power consumption Therefore the calculation formula is as follows Wpw S Is W I5v Current consumption of logic 5 VDC circuit of each module 2 Power consumption of a total of 5 VDC logic section of each module The power consumption of the 5 VDC output circuit section of the power supply module is the power consumption of each module including the current consumption of the base unit Wsv Isv x 5 W 3 A total of 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module power consumption for simultaneous ON points The average power of the external 24 VDC power is the total power consumption of each module Waav l24V x 24 W 4 Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the output module Power consumption for simultaneous ON points WOUT IOUT x Vdrop x Number of outputs x Simultaneous ON rate W loUT Output current Current in actual use A Vdrop Voltage drop in each output module V 5 Average power consumption of the input section of the input module Power consumption for simultaneous ON points WIN IIN xX E X Number of input points x Simultaneous ON rate W IIN Input current Effective value for AC A E Input voltage Voltage in actual use V 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 6 Power consumption of the power supply se
245. r supply when the PLC main module power is turned on If the external power supply is turned on first it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation When there are communication problems with the data link refer to the corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the like to the intelligent function module to exercise control data change on the running PLC configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the whole system will always operate safely Also before exercising other control program change operating status change status control on the running PLC read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program corrective and other actions to be taken as a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between the external device and PLC CPU A CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from eac
246. re shown below SD10 SD1 E H Higher8 bits Lowers bits Higher8 bits Xtension name netiRe Sequence program SFC program po STH THT 4H Deviceinitialvalue po STH THT SPH QDR Fileregister o 11 60 11 60 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Baise Set by Corresponding Corresponding CPU SD5 Time value set Number Meaning SD5 Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us SD6 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD7 SD10 SD11 Vacant SD12 SD8 SD13 SD14 SD15 SD9 Program error location E Number Meaning rror SD5 SD10 common Error compon SD6 File name S Error New O Rem information information SD7 ASCII code 8 characters SD8 SD11 SD9 Extension 2EH SD10 ASCII code 3 characters SD11 Pattern 4 SD12 Block No SD12 SD13 Step No transition No SD14 Sequence step No L SD15 Sequence step No H SD13 4 Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number 0 0 to 0 O k gt lok SD14 __ SFC block designation present Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present SD15 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 11 61 11 61 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU CPU DoT Individual information corresponding to error codes SD
247. red trigger ON IS after all triggers Goes OFF when step trace is commenced change Step OFF Not completed Goes ON at step trace completion S Status tracecompleted ON End Goes OFF when step trace is commenced change OFE Normal Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace S Status New ON Errors change 8 Latch area Meaning Explanation When Set OFF Keyboard input RKEY notregistered Goes ON at registration of keyboard input registration flag ON Keyboard input OFF if keyboard input is not registered registered S Status change After step trace OFF Not after trigger trigger ON Is after first trigger w oO o 3 fa Q o o A A z z z z fo oO co N N N a Instruction execution 11 50 11 50 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 9 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU special relays M9000 to M9255 after A to Q QnA conversion All of these special relays are controlled by the system so that users cannot turn them ON OFF in the program If users want to turn these relays ON OFF the program should be modified to use QCPU QnACPU special relays For SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 however if a user can turn ON OFF some of special relays M9084 and M9200 through M9255 before conversion the user can also turn ON OFF the corresponding relays among SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 after
248. rence of a continuation error 2 An online module change can be continued if the control status of the CPU module is changed to STOP PAUSE during the online module change In either of the following cases however the online module change cannot be continued e The CPU module was reset e A stop error occurred e Number of modules that can be changed online The number of modules that can be changed online at one time is one per CPU module You cannot change two or more modules at the same time 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 2 Restrictions during online module change The following operations fail an online module change a One CPU module gets the online module change orders from multipe GX Developer at the same time Requests from multiple GX Developers are made of one CPU module for an online module change b Parameters are written to the CPU module during an online module change The following message will appear in case one CPU module gets the online module change orders from multipe GX Developer at the same time After confirming the message choose Yes or No le change is executed from other equipments ange after changing the connection path When you selected Yes Operation for an online module change is switched to that of GX Developer 2 that request later Operation is continued from the pre switching status When you selected No Operation for an on
249. rk module being accessed value there Program error location is faulty 2 The intelligent function module that is being accessed has a 2111 The location designated by a link direct device JNO is nota hardware error Consult the nearest service center agent or our network module branch office and describe the symptom 1 The location designated by a intelligent function module dedicated instruction is not a intelligent function module 2112 2 The network number specified by the network dedicated instruction does not exist or the network module is not the corresponding one ively itis not the relevant intelligent function module network module or a relay target network does not exist An instruction which on execution specifies other stations has been used for specifying the host station An instruction that does Read the individual information of the error check the program not allow the host station to be specified corresponding that value program error location and make An instruction which on execution specifies the host station has correction Read error individual information then check and edit the special O function module Network module dedicated instruction that corresponds to the numerical value there program error location been used for specifying other stations An instruction that does not allow other stations to be specified An instruction that does not allow the module under the cont
250. rk the data is active then start communication error module that relays the data is not active 4A01H The network with the No set in the routing Check the routing parameter set in the related station parameter does not exist and make a correction sis Check if an error has occurred in the network module 4A02H Cannot access the specified station and if the module is offline i ut _ Check if an error has occurred in the specified access 4B00H A related PAA it a MEO ae destination onin destination or in a relay station to the access station and y if so take countermeasures App 7 App 7 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 External Dimensions APPENDIX 2 1 CPU module nn 98 3 86 89 3 3 52 27 4 1 08 Unit mm inch App 8 App 8 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 2 Power supply module 1 Power Supply Module Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P WELSEC POWER 98 3 86 lt PULL MITSUBISHI 55 2 2 17 Unit mm inch 2 Power Supply Module Q64P
251. rm when the capacity of the battery is lowered Even after it is energized the data is held for a specified time For safety however replace the battery with a new one as early as possible The SM52 is energized when the battery causes a complete discharge error Immediately after the relay has been energized replace the battery with a new one Whichever voltage of the battery of the CPU module and SRAM card is lowered the SM51 and SM52 are energized To identify the specific battery of the memory of which voltage is lowered check the contents of the special resisters SD51 and SD52 When the voltage of the battery of each memory is lowered the bit corresponding to each of SD51 and SD52 memories is turned on Bit No of SD51 and SD52 CPU module Bit 1 2 SRAM card POINTS The relation between the backups of the memories preformed by the batteries which are installed on the CPU module and SRAM card is described below The items that must be considered are the following two points 1 The battery installed on the CPU module cannot backup the memory of the SRAM card 2 The battery installed on the SRAM card cannot backup the memory of the CPU module Power supply Battery of CPU Battery of Memory of CPU Memory of Module Module SRAM Card Module SRAM Card Connection Unconnection Connection Unconnection O Backup enable X Backup unable The standard service life and replacement procedures of the battery is des
252. rmance to the EMC Directive and the judgment on whether or not the machinery conforms to the EMC Directive must be determined finally by the manufacturer of the machinery 8 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive The standards applicable to the EMC Directive are listed below 30 M 230 MHz QP 30 dB u V m EN55011 Electromagnetic emissions from the 30 m in measurement range 1 Radiated noise 2 product are measured 230 M 1000 MHz QP 37 dB u V m 30 m in measurement range EN55011 ae ett americas from the 150 k 500 kHz QP 79 dB Mean 66 dB 1 Conducted noise P P 500 k 30 MHz QP 73 dB Mean 60 dB measured Immunity test in which static ENGTO0O RE electricity is applied to the cabinet of 15 k V Aerial discharge Electrostatic immunity gt 2 the equipment Power line 2kV Digital I O 24 V or higher 1 kV EN50081 2 1995 EN61000 4 4 Immunity test in which burst noise is EN61131 2 Fast transient burst noise gt 2 ar tote power ne and signa Digital I O 24 V or less gt 250 V Analog I O signal lines gt 250 V 1996 sai AM Immunity test in which field is 10 V m 26 1000 MHz irradiated to the product 80 AM modulation 1 kHz modulation 2 EN61000 4 12 Immunity test in which a damped Damped oscillatory wave oscillatory wave is superimposed on immunity the power line Power line Digital I O 24 V or higher x1 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 2 The PLC is an open
253. rned OFF Abnormal if the LED does not turn ON or turn OFF as indicated above The LED turns ON when the output power is turned ON Check that the LED turns The LED must be extinguished when the ON and OFF output power is turned OFF Abnormal if the LED does not turn ON or turn OFF as indicated above Securely engaged Input LED Module indication LED 10 10 2 10 2 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 2 Periodic Inspection The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year are listed below When the equipment is moved or modified or layout of the wiring is changed also perform this inspection Periodic Inspection Inspection Item Judgment Criteria Ambient temperature When the sequencer is Measure with a thermometer used in the board the Ambient humidity and a hygrometer 5 to 95 RH 1 ambient temperature in Measure corrosive gas the board becomes the i ambient temperature Corrosive gas must not be present Measure a voltage across the 85 to 132VAC Chande ihe comer Power voltage terminals of 100 200VAC and 170to264VAC sid z iy z 24VDC 15 60 312v SMPPY Further tighten screws Move the module to check for The module must be installed If the CPU I O or power looseness and rattling fixedly supply module is loose fix it with screws Ambient environment Looseness rattling Q s po D Adhesion of dirt and foreign matter
254. rol of another station to be specified is being used for a similar task Read the individual information of the error check the program corresponding that value program error location and make A CPU module that cannot be specified in the instruction dedicated i 2117 to the multiple CPU system was specified correction 2120 __ Either a QA1SLB or QALB is connected 2121 The CPU module is installed at other than the CPU slot or slots 0 to 2 B heck the loading position of the CPU module and reinstall it at the correct slot 2122 QA1SLB is used to the main base unit Use Q3_ B as the main base unit E A Remove the module installed at 65th or later slot 1 A module is installed at 65th or higher slot 2 A module is installed at the slot later than the number of slots Boney i audit at the Sol later than the number of specified with base allocation setting Soon ee oe ee WIU DASG a OCauon SeUng 3 A module is installed at the O points later than the 4 096th eon installed at the I O points later than the point i 4 A module installed at the 4 096th point occupies higher points change hg module to a module which does not exceed the 1 A module which the High Performance model QCPU cannot Install a module which can be used with the CPU recognise has been installed The intelligent function module is experiencing hardware 2 There was no response form the intelligent function module problems Contact
255. rop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit Q501B 5VDC current consumption when the Q5DB is used as Extension n 1 n 1 to 5 n Extension No of the Q6LB connected Sum total of current consumed by Q501B and currents consumed by I O intelligent function modules loaded on the Q50B 5VDC current consumption of the GOT current consumption per GOT is 254mA e Im 254 x c c Number of GOTs connected c 1 to 5 6 9 6 9 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q When connecting GOT by extension cable that is 13 2 m 43 31ft or longer the bus extension connector box A9GT QCNB is required Since the A9GT QCNB is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module loaded on the main base unit 29mA must be added to Im as the current consumption of the A9GT QCNB For details of the GOT bus connection refer to the GOT A900 Series User s Manual Connection 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY This section describes the specifications and handling of the memory card and battery which can be used on the Process CPU The memory card is necessary for sampling tracing The memory card is also used to handle file registers of more than the number of points that can be stored in the standard RAM Refer to Section 4 1 7 1 Memory Card Specifications The specifications of the memory card which can be used on the Process CPU adheres to the PCMCIA small PC card On
256. round it in the opposite side PLC Shielded cable Input Output e Where wiring runs through piping ground the piping without fail f Run the 24VDC input line away from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines g Wiring of 200m 686 67 ft or longer distance will give rise to leakage currents due to the line capacity resulting in a fault Refer to Section 11 5 for details 3 Grounding To ground the cable follow the steps a to c shown below a Use the dedicated grounding as far as possible b When a dedicated grounding cannot be performed use 2 Common Grounding shown below PLC Another Another Another equipment equipment equipment grounding grounding 1 Independent grounding Best 2 Common grounding Good 3 Joint grounding Not allowed c For grounding a cable use the cable of 2 mm or more Position the ground contact point as closely to the sequencer as possible and reduce the length of the grounding cable as much as possible 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 6 2 Connecting to the power supply module The following diagram shows the wiring example of power lines grounding lines etc to the main and extension base units Main base unit 100 110VAC Q38B AC HIE Jeq Q61P A1 CPU module X Fuse H x r 0 IK ri 0 ERR fer ono o Lyrae 24VDC 0 i aay fc k bb Shoo i 1 abd HS t
257. rrite cores if shield cables pulled out of the enclosure do not provide sufficient shielding effects It should be noted that the ferrite cores should be fitted to the cables in the position immediately before they are pulled out of the enclosure If the fitting position is improper the ferrite will not produce any effect In the CC Link system however ferrite cores cannot be fitted to cables Noise filter power supply line filter A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise It is not required to fit the noise filter to the power supply line but fitting it can further suppress noise The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10 MHz or less The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below a Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter When bundled the output side noise will be induced into the input side wires from which the noise was filtered Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Introduction Output side Output side device side device side 1 The noise will be included when the 2 Separate and lay the input input and output wires are bundled and output wires b Earth the noise filter earthing terminal to the control cabinet with the shortest wire possible approx 10 cm 3 94 inch Reference Noise Filter FN343 3 01 FN660 6 06 ZHC2203 11 Model Name SCHAFFNER SCHAFF
258. rror Error description hexadecimal item 4084H he specified pointer P cannot be detected 4085 Pointer P cannot be specified because the program is not specified in the parameter Check the data to be searched Specify pointer P I after registering the program to be executed in the parameter Check the pointer No to be added and make correction Check the specified pointer and make a correction 4086H Pointer P has already been added 4087H rying to specify too many pointers 4088 The specified step No was not in the instruction y Other errors header An END instruction was inserted deleted while Conduct Insert removal after the CPU module has 4089H the CPU module was running stopped Check the specified step No and make a correction during Run Write the program after the CPU module has stopped Reexecute after the CPU module is in a status where the mode request can be executed Check the number of settings and make a correction Check the number of registrations and make a correction Check the number of registrations and make a correction Check the number of registrations and make a correction he block breakpoint number was exceeded Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Reconduct the request after the processing has ended Online registration errors during SFC STEP RUN i Reconduct the request after the pr
259. rs in parentheses __ the special register L where individual is x 6 xx indicates detected annunciator number 7 x indicates detected contact and coil number 11 35 11 35 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres eri Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action Ina multiple CPU system at PLC fault occurred at a station Read the individual error information using GX Developer check ee all station stop by stop error of PLC was selected in the the error of the CPU resulting in CPU fault and remove the operating mode error 2 High Performance model QCPU of function version A was Remove the High Performance model QCPU of function version loaded in a multiple CPU system A from the main base unit In a multiple CPU system station 1 resulted in stop error at power on and the other stations cannot start This error occurred at stations 2 to 4 1 There is no response from the target station in a multiple CPU system at initial communication stage Read the individual error information using GX Developer check the error of the CPU resulting in CPU fault and remove the error Reset the High Performance model QCPU and run it again If the same error is displayed again it is a hardware fault of any PLC Consult your sales representative 2 High Performance model QCPU of function version A was 2 Remove the Hi A igh Performance model QCPU of function version loaded in a multiple CPU syste
260. s S SM400 Always ON aa Normally is ON Every END processing M9036 S Every END M9037 ON Ta jes pa i eens wor ON ON for 1 scan 1 scan oF e a alae only after RUN SM403 After RUN OFF for 1 scan only Low speed execution type program ON for 1 scan only after RUN Low speed execution type program After RUN OFF for 1 scan only ON gt OFF 1 scan ON OF Fe 0 01 second clock 0 005 sec 0 005 sec n n n z z E B B 3 a a BR n R a fo o L 7 D O fo 5 a Q fo 9 x secondetock e nsec 2 second clock nsec SM411 SM412 SM413 SM414 2n second clock n M415 2n ms clock n ms User timing clock No 0 User timing clock No 1 User timing clock User timing clock User timing clock User timing clock User timing clock SM432 User timing clock No 7 User timing clock User timing clock 11 47 SM420 n R S After RUN ON for 1 scan only e This contact can be used for scan execution type programs only After RUN OFF for 1 scan only e This contact can be used for scan execution type programs only After RUN ON for 1 scan only This contact can be used for low speed execution type programs only After RUN OFF for 1 scan only e This contact can be used for low speed execution type programs only e This relay repeats ON OFF at ever
261. s applied to load when output turns When the polarity of the power supply is 1 off the capacitor C is charged When the polarity is 2 the voltage charged in C plus the power supply voltage is applied to across D1 The maximum value of the voltage is approx 2 2E This usage does not cause problems to the output components but may deteriorate the diode built in the load causing burnout etc e Leakage current due to the built in surge e Connect a resistor across the load suppressor If the wiring from the output module to the QY22 load is long be careful since there may be a Load does Output module leakage current due to the line capacity not turn off Resistor Triac teak output eakage curren Example 1 Example 2 11 41 11 41 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 6 Special Relay List 11 42 Special relays SM are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the PLC For this reason they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal internal relays However they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU module and remote I O modules The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings Explanation Contains detailed information about the nature of the special relay e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by u
262. s Controller GX Developer General name for GX Developer Version 7 10L or later Main base unit General name for Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B type main base unit with Process CPU Q Series power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable Extension base unit and intelligent function module attachable Series power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable Base unit General name for Main base unit and extension base unit SRAM card Abbreviation for Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS types SRAM card Flash card General name for Q2MEM 2MBF and Q2MEM 4MBF types Flash card General name for Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA and Q2MEM 32MBA types ATA ATA card card Memory card General name for SRAM card Flash card and ATA card Power supply module bait name for Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P and Q64P types power supply General name for battery for Q6BAT type CPU module and Q2MEM BAT type SRAM card Gene name for QCO5B QCO06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B type extension Battery 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q This User s Manual describes the hardware specifications and handling methods of the Process CPU The Manual also describes those items related to the specifications of the power supply module main base unit extension base unit extension cable memory card and battery The Process CPU is a process control compatible CPU module Based on the High Performance model QCPU the Process CPU has th
263. scan time and low speed program 2 The low speed program execution time specified in the PC RAS execution time in the parameter so that the margin time of setting parameter exceeded the margin time of constant scan constant scan may be fully reserved 5011 Low speed scan type program scan time goes over the low speed Read the error individual information at a GX Developer check the execution WDT set in the parameter PC RAS settings numerical value time there and shorten scan time if necessary 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored Read the error individual information at a GX Developer check the numerical value time there and shorten scan time if necessary 11 34 11 34 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Error Code Common Individual Operating Error Messages Information yen LED Status Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SDO x 1 SD5 to 15 x 1 SD16 to 26 7000 MULT CPU DOWN Unit module No Flicker Stop 7002 At power ON Reset 7003 At power ON Reset MULTI EXE ERROR Unit module No HA At power ON Reset 9000 Fea k 6 Program error location Annunciator number number Conia When instucionisoeoued instruction is executed USER LED On 9010 lt CHK gt cS Program error location Failure No Continue When instruction is executed Deak ak ak ak USER LED On me es ee l gt ath palit 10000 CONT UNIT ERROR 1 Characte
264. scription Countermeasure hexadecimal item The request contents cannot be executed 4050H because the memory card write protect switch Turn off the memory card write protect switch is on PA f Check the following and make it countermeasures The specified device memory cannot be 4051H Is the memory one that can be used accessed ce e Is the specified drive memory correctly installed 4052u Protecterror The specified file attribute is read only so the Do not write data in the specified file data cannot be written Or change the file attribute Check the specified drive memory Or reexecute write after changing the corresponding drive memory Check the specified drive memory Or re erase after replacing the corresponding drive memory The monitor condition registration CPU module Reexecute monitor after the monitor by the other system area is already being used by another equipment has completed Or increase the system area piece of equipment of the program memory using the format with option Do not conduct monitor detail condi tions from the specified equipment An error occurred when writing data to the 4053H it y specified drive memory An error occurred when deleting the data in the ee specified drive memory The monitor detail condition is already being used and monitored byahother piege of Or reexecute monitoring after deleting the monitor detail equipment im conditions of the other equipment 4063H The
265. se unit a voltage drop occurs at extension cables Improper I O may be provided if the specified voltage 4 75VDC or higher is not supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B When using the Q50B make sure that the IN connector of the Q5DB is supplied with 4 75VDC or higher And it is recommend to connect it with the shortest possible extension cable right after connecting the main base unit so as to minimize the effects of voltage drop 1 When only the Q50B is connected to the extension base unit a Selection condition 4 75VDC or higher should be supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B in the final extension stage b How to calculate voltage to IN connector The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4 90VDC Therefore the Q50B can be used if the voltage drop is 0 15VDC or lower 4 9VDC 4 75VDC 0 15VDC Main base unit Q3DB Extension Cable Power Extension Cable suppl Conductor aes pply Type a module Resistance Q V1 R1 Extension base unit Q5DB QC05B 0 044 j QC06B 0 051 Y Extension stage 1 zg QC12B 0 082 QC30B 0 172 V2 R2 Extension base unit Q5D0B QC50B 0 273 eel Ae ae Extension stage 2 QC100B 0 530 2 I ae Gi I Extension base unit Q50B I Symbol Description Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit Extension stage 7 Voltage drop at the ext
266. section of the shielded cable from which the outer cover was partly removed for exposure is earthed to the control panel on an increased contact surface A clamp may also be used as shown in the figure below In this case however apply a cover to the painted inner wall surface of the control panel which comes in contact with the clamp section Note The method of earthing by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the shielded cable as shown below is not recommended The high frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective Clamp fitting Paint mask Shielded cable Shielded cable Wire Crimp terminal 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 2 4 MELSEC Q MELSECNET H module Always use a double shielded coaxial cable MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD 5C 2V CCY for the coaxial cables MELSECNET H module Radiated noise in the range of 30MHz or higher can be suppressed by use of the double shielded coaxial cables Earth the double shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground Shield here Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield Ethernet module Web server module Precautions for using AUI cables twisted pair cables and coaxial cables are described below a Always earth the AUI cables connected to the 10BASE5 connectors Because the AUI cable is of the shielded type strip part of the outer cover and earth the exposed shield section to the ground on th
267. sed by the program 3203 The execution type set for an SFC program in the parameters is other than the scan execution type The first O number in the intelligent function module parameter set 3300 Jon GX Configurator differs from the actual I O number Check the parameter setting indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 1 Characters in parentheses 11 30 MELSEC Q Corres Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding PU 1 Delete the MELSECNET H network parameter of the MELSECNET H under control of another station 2 Change the setting to the first O number of the MELSECNET H under control of the host station Reset the CPU module Check the network parameters and the installation state If inconsistency is found arrange consistency between the network parameters and the installation state If network parameters are changed write the new network parameters to the CPU module Check the number of extension stages of the extension base unit Check the connection of the extension base unit and connector If the display unit is connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the connection state If the error persists after the above items 1 to 3 are checked the hardware is faulty Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative and explain the symptom Correct the type or station number of the MELSECNET H module in the parameter to meet the
268. ser in sequence program or test operation at a GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Indicated only if setting is done by system Set by When set Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error is generated Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc Corresponding ACPU Indicates special relay M9 LJ L L corresponding to the ACPU Me OOo Change and notation when there has been a change in contents e Items indicated as New have been newly added for Process CPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU module type name Rem Can be applied to Process CPU and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to Process CPU Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules For details on the following items refer to the following e Networks For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e SFC QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 1 SM1200 to SM1255 are used for QnNACPU These relays are vacant with Process CPU 11 42 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 1 Diagnost
269. ssured 2 The Process CPU cannot use the slim type main base unit Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB 3 The Q series power supply module is not required for the Q5UB type extension base unit 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 Configuration of peripheral devices MITSUBISHI Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA et D MELSEC Q T Process CPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU PC card adapter Q2MEM ADP RS 232 cable QC30R2 ZL KL LP PZ LEFF EPO k LESSEE USB cable 1 To be procured yourself LS EEE ED SESE A SESS Sp Personal Computer GX Developer Version 7 10L or later 1 For how to write to the memory card and the details of the USB cable refer to the operating manual of the GX Developer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 3 Outline of system configuration Main base unit Q312B Power supply module 0123 45 67 8 9 1011 lt Slot No OF Extension cable CPU module pply Lack The figure shows the configuration S298 when 32 1 O modules are loaded to each slot 1DF 1FF 21F 23F 25F 27F 29F Extension base unit Q68B Extension base unit Q68B 2nd extension Power supply module Sh edenson Power supply module stage J 24 25 26 27 28
270. ster stations only LRDP instruction for ACPU recep tion for local station Link parameter check results y M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203 M9204 M9205 M9206 M9207 M9208 MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Meaning OFF Not accepted ON Accepted OFF Not completed ON End OFF Not accepted ON Accepted OFF Not completed ON End OFF Not completed ON End OFF Not completed ON End OFF Transmits to tier2 and tier 3 ON Transmits to tier2 only OFF Executing the check function ON Check non execution Details Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device read instruction has been received Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNRD instruction e Use the RST instruction to reset Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device read instruction execution is complete e Used as a condition contact for resetting SM1202 and SM1203 after the ZNRD instruction is complete e Use the RST instruction to reset Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device write instruction has been received e Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNWR instruction e Use the RST instruction to reset Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device write instruction execution is complete e Used as a condition contact to reset SM1202 and SM1203 after the ZNWR instruction is complete e Use the RST instruction to reset On indicates that the ZNRD instructi
271. sulation refers to the insulation with the dielectric withstand voltage shown in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Intensive Insulation Withstand Voltage Installation Category II source IEC664 Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area Surge withstand voltage 1 2 50 us 150VAC or below 2500 V 300VAC or below 4000 V 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION In order to increase the reliability of the system and exploit the maximum performance of its functions this section describes the methods and precautions for the mounting and installation of the system 9 1 General Safety Requirements DANGER Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the PLC module Otherwise trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation 1 Outside the PLC construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits such as emergency stop protective circuits positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward reverse operations 2 When the PLC detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will stop calculation and hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage protection equipment b The PLC CPUs self diagnostic
272. system protect switch contents because it is in system protect 4005 The volume of data handled according to the Reduce the volume of data to that which can be H specified request is too large processed at the specified request 4006H The password cannot be deleted Delete the set password The CPU module is not BUSY The buffer is not 4008H vacant After the free time has passed reexecute the request The CPU module is running to the request 40101 g q Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status contents cannot be executed The CPU module is not in the STEP RUN i CPU mode Execute after setting the CPU module to STEP RUN 4011H status so the request contents cannot be error status executed 4013 An attempt was made to change any parameter Change the parameter values after an online module H value during an online module change change is over App 2 App 2 APPENDICES 4021H MELSEC Q Error code Error as A s Error description Countermeasure hexadecimal item 40224 4023H 40244 4025H 4033H App 3 CPU file related error CPU device specified error Intelligent function module specification error The fil h th ified fil file No S TO i e speciftea flenameor Nla No Check the specified file name and file No does not exist The file name and file No of the specified file do not match Do not access the specified file Forcefully execute the request forcibly Or reexecute
273. t onreine arr e aE 11 2 11 2 2 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is not turned On cccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeaeeeeseaeeaees 11 3 11 2 3 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering ccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeeeeeeateaees 11 4 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned Off ceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeseeeeeeaeeaeeneeaeens 11 5 11 2 5 Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned off 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaseaeenaeeeas 11 6 11 2 6 When the RUN LED is flickering eera nena euan anean EKKERT E ANEREN AREKE TENNETEK 11 6 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on fflickering sesssssssessesissrssisrrsrsrrsrnsrnsrsrnsrnsrnsrnsenns 11 7 11 2 8 When the USER LED is turned O1 eceeeeeeeeececeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeaecaeeeeeeaesaecaeseaesaesaesaeseaetaeeaeeeseatas 11 8 11 2 9 When the BAT LED is turned O1 cceecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeecaeeseaeeseeaeseeaeeseaeeecaeeseeaeeesaeesaees 11 8 11 2 10 Flowchart for when the BOOT LED is fliCkKe ring e ceecceceeseeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeaeeaeseeteaeeaees 11 9 11 2 11 Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned ON 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeateeaeeeaeeeas 11 10 11 2 12 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn ON eee eee eeeeeeeeteeteeeteees 11 11 11 2 13 Flowchart for when unable to read a program ou eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeea
274. tages voltages higher than 42 4V peak inside the power supply modules of the 100 200VAC rated I O voltages Therefore the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and secondary 2 I O module There are dangerous voltages voltages higher than 42 4V peak inside the I O modules of the 100 200VAC rated I O voltages Therefore the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and secondary The I O modules of 24VDC or less rating are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 3 CPU module memory card base unit Using 5VDC circuits inside the above modules are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 4 Intelligent function modules special function modules The intelligent function modules special function modules such as the analog network and positioning modules are 24VDC or less in rated voltage and are therefore out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 5 Display device Use the CE marked display device 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 2 3 Power supply 8 2 4 Control box MELSEC Q The insulation specification of the power supply module was designed assuming installation category Il Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the PLC The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by a thunderbolt Category has the lowest durability category IV has the highest d
275. the conversion For details on the ACPU special relays see the user s manuals for the individual CPUs and MELSECNET or MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manuals The processing time may be longer when converted special relays are used with QCPU Uncheck A series CPU compatibility setting within the PC system setting in GX Developer PC parameters when converted special relays are not used The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification column When a special relay for modification is provided the device number should be changed to the provided QCPU QnACPU special relay When W is provided the converted special relay can be used for the device number When Ais provided the device number does not work with QCPU QnACPU Special Relay List ACPU Special Special Applicable Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details Pp i bs fae CPU Relay Conversion Modification e Turned on when there is one or more output units of OFF Normal which fuse has been blown Remains on if normal status M9000 SM1000 Fuse blown ON Fuse blown module with is restored blown fuse present Output modules of remote I O stations are also checked fore fuse condition e Turned on if the states of O module is different form entered states when power is turned on Remains on if normal states is restored M9002 SM1002 VO module eap Normal I O module verification is done also to remote I O
276. the MELSECNET MINI master A2C or A52G It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not when the END instruction is processed to set the END instruction processing time e Check for breakage of fuse e Collation check of I O unit e Check of battery Set when an operation error detail factor is stored at D1091 and remains set after normal status is restored Set when an error occurred at execution of the microcomputer program package and remains set after normal status is restored After the head address of the required I O module is set to SD251 switching SM251 on allows the I O module to be changed in online mode One module is only allowed to be changed by one setting To be switched on in the program or peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU RUN To be switched on in peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU STOP RUN STOP mode must not be changed until I O module change is complete Turned on if the SFC program is registered and turned off if it is not Should be turned on by the program if the SFC program is to be started If turned off operation output of the execution step is turned off and the SFC program is stopped Selects the starting step when the SFC program is restarted using SM322 ON All execution conditions when the SFC program stopped are cleared and the program is started with the initial step of block 0 OFF Started with the step of the bl
277. the request after the processing from the other location has ended The keyword specification set in the Access by specifying the keyword set in the corresponding drive memory is required corresponding drive memory The specified range exceeds the file range Check the specified range and access within that range Forcefully execute the request forcibly The same file already exists Or reexecute after changing the file name Revise the specified file contents The specified file capacity cannot be obtained Or reexecute after cleaning up and reorganizing the specified drive memory The request contents cannot be executed in the Do not execute a request for a specified drive memory in specified drive memory which an error has occurred Currently the request contents cannot be ae J Reexecute after the free wait time has passed he specified device name cannot be handled Check the specified device name 7A Ic Delete the file and then recreate the file The specifi rive mem not exi R ediarive memony does not existar Check the specified drive memory status there is an error The specified file is processing the request from a different location he specified device No is outside the range heck the specified device No There is a mistake in the specified d i p ovis Check the specified device qualification method qualification Writing cannot be done because the specified Do not write the data in the specified devic
278. tion When set ACPU CPU pI I Set the basic period 1 second units use for the process pak Basic period tee period control instructior using floating point data Floating points data SD1501 SD1500 Process control Process control instruction detail instruction detail error code error code Process control Process control instruction instruction Shows the error process block that occurred in the process S Error generated error generated error control instruction occurrence location location D1 if i SD1506 Dummy device Dummy device Used E specify dummy devices by a process control U New SD1507 instruction e Shows the detailed error contents for the error that occurred S Error in the process control instruction occurrence 11 89 11 89 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDICES APPENDIX 1 Error Code Return to Origin During General Data Processing The CPU module returns an error code to the general data processing request origin when an error occurs and there is a general data processing request form the peripheral equipment intelligent function module or network system If an error occurs App when a general data processing is requested from the peripheral devices intelligent function module and network system This error code is not an error that is detected by the CPU module self diagnostic function so it is not stored in the special relay SDO When the request origin is a GX Developer a messa
279. tion setting 7 9 2 Monitoring test for local device 7 9 3 Enforced ON OFF of external I O 7 10 Writing in Program during Process CPU RUN 7 10 1 Writing data in the circuit mode during RUN 7 10 2 Writing a batch of files during RUN 7 11 Execution Time Measurement 7 11 1 Program monitor list 7 11 2 Interrupt program monitor list 7 11 3 Scan time measurement 7 12 Sampling Trace Function 7 13 Debug Function with Multiple Users 7 13 1 Multiple user monitoring function 7 13 2 Multiple user RUN write function 7 14 Watch dog Timer WDT 7 15 Self Diagnosis Function 7 15 1 Interrupt due to error occurrence 7 15 2 LED display when error occurs 7 15 3 Error caucellation 7 16 Failure History 7 17 System Protect 7 17 1 Password registration 7 17 2 Remote password 7 18 Monitoring Process CPU System Status from GX Developer System Monitor 7 19 LED Display 7 19 1 LED display 7 19 2 Priority setting 7 20 Module Service Interval Time Reading 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE 8 1 Communication Between Process CPU and Q series Intelligent Function Modules 8 1 1 Initial setting and automatic refresh setting using GX Configurator 8 1 2 Communication using device initial value 8 1 3 Communication using FROM TO instruction 8 1 4 Communication using the intelligent function module device 8 1 5 Communication using the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 8 2 Request from Intelligent Function Module
280. tion version can be confirmed with the list of product information on the GX Developer system monitor Serial Nos and function versions of the intelligent function module and CPU module can also be confirmed Serial number Function version Product Information List Intelli Q QU71LP21 25 32pt 0000 020810000000000 None 7 7 7 None Gas None None 7 CSV file creating Close ENERAL SPECIFICATION 3 G SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Performance specification of PLC is as follows Specifications Operating ambient 0 to 55 C temperature Storage ambient 25 to 75 C temperature Operating ambient Aa 5 to 95 RH non condensing humidity Storage ambient ae 5 to 95 RH non condensing humidity Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Under 0 075mm Conforming 10 to 57Hz l intermittent 0 003inch to 10 times each in Vibration resistance vibration 57to150Hz 9sm JIS B 3502 57 to 150Hz 9 8m s X Y Z directions continuous 0 001 inch vibration 57t0150H2 4o Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times in each of 3 directions X Y Z No corrosive gases 2000m 6562ft max Installation location Inside control panel Overvoltage category 1 Pollution level x2 Il max x1 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution n
281. tional Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required in terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications Process CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection MODEL QNPHCPU U HH E MODEL 13JR55 SH NA 080314E B 0210 MEE afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE 1 8 12 OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO KU 104 6212 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
282. to Process CPU 8 2 1 Interrupt from the intelligent function module 9 PARAMETER LIST 10 DEVICES 10 1 Device List 10 2 Internal User Devices 10 2 1 Inputs X 10 2 2 Outputs Y 10 2 3 Internal relays M 10 2 4 Latch relays L 10 2 5 Anunciators F 10 2 6 Edge relay V 10 2 7 Link relays B 10 2 8 Link special relays SB 10 2 9 Step relays S 10 2 10 Timers T 10 2 11 Counters C 10 2 12 Data registers D 10 2 13 Link registers W 10 2 14 Link special registers SW 10 3 Internal System Devices 10 3 1 Function devices FX FY FD 10 3 2 Special relays SM 10 3 3 Special registers SD 10 4 Link Direct Devices Jt 10 5 Intelligent Function Module Devices Ut 3 Gc3 10 6 Index Registers Z 10 6 1 Switching between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs 10 6 2 Switching between scan low speed execution programs and interrupt fixed scan execution type programs 10 7 File Registers R 10 7 1 File register capacity 10 7 2 Differences in memory card access method by memory card type 10 7 3 Registering the file registers 10 7 4 File register designation method 10 7 5 Precautions in using file registers 10 8 Nesting N 10 9 Pointers 10 9 1 Local pointers 10 9 2 Common pointers 10 10 Interrupt Pointers I 10 11 Other Devices 10 11 1 SFC block device BL 10 11 2 SFC transition device TR 10 11 3 Network No designation device J 10 11 4 I O No designation device U 10 11 5 Macro
283. to within the specification explaining a detailed description of the problem For the trouble that the input signal to the input module is not turned off troubleshoot referring to Section 11 5 Examples of I O ModuleTroubleshooting 11 11 11 11 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 13 Flowchart for when unable to read a program The following shows the flowchart to be followed when communication with GX Developer cannot be made during PLC power on The CPU cannot communicate with the GX Developer Is the memory to be read correct Select the correct memory Can the CPU communicate with the GX Developer Is the connection cable connected properly Connect the connection cable properly an the CPU communicat with the GX Developer YES communicate with the GX Developer by replacing the connection cable Is the USB driver installed in the personal computer Install the USB driver into the personal computer Is the connection type RS 232 an the CPU communicat with the GX Developer Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Can the CPU Communicate with GX Developer by lowering the baud rate YES Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative y explaining a detailed descr
284. ue range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module When installing more cables be sure that the base unit and the module connectors are installed correctly After installation check them for looseness Poor connections could cause an input or output failure Securely load the memory card by pushing it into the memory card loading slot Check for insecure loading after loading the memory card Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Completely turn off the external power supply before loading or unloading the module Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product Note that online module change can be made when the QnPHCPU is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed online and each module has a predetermined changing procedure For details refer to the section of online module change in this manual Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module This section gives instructions for handling the CPU I O intelligent function and power supply modules base units and so on 1 Module enclosure terminal block connectors and pin connectors are made of resin do not drop them or subject them to strong impact 2
285. uest again after mounting the module that is changed online the same as the one changed online When making a request specify the head I O number of 4215H The specified module does not exist the module that will be changed online or make a request again after mounting the module 4216H Online module The specified module is faulty Make a request again after changing the module 4217H change related ee no response from the sp cified Continue the online module changing operation error Do not make a request where an error occurred or 4218H Mie parale nt ingomipatible with make a request again to the module compatible with 9e online module change ia 3 Do not make a request to the module that is mounted on 42194 The specified module is mounted on the h oib inb a extension base that has no power supply the extension base or main base that has no power supply The specified module is not in a control group See the CPU module that controls the 421By el alin a ayaa ata ee Resume processing after checking the contents of the m Ji 9 intelligent function module buffer memory 1 The specified station could not be accessed because a routing parameter was not setin 1 Set the routing parameter for accessing the specified 4A00n the related station station in the related station 2 Though routing via the multi CPU system is 2 Try after a while Or confirm if the system relaying Link related attempted the control CPU of the netwo
286. up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers Stores conditions for up to numbers Corresponding Detail etails CPU Station numbers of local stations that have detected errors are stored into corresponding data register bits as indicated below Device number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 he bit corresponding to SD1216 SD1217 SD1218 SD1219 If a local station detects an error the station number becomes 1 Example When station 6 and 12 detect an error bits 5 and 11 in SD1216 become 1 and when D1216 is monitored its value is 2080 820n Stores the local station numbers that have mismatches between the parameters of the master station of tier three and those of the master station in tier two in the three tier system or the remote I O station numbers that have incorrect I O assignment as shown below in correspondence with the data register bits Device Bit number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bo SD1220 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 SD1221 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L
287. upply module WPW 3 7 X 0 64 0 05 0 05 0 43 0 55 0 074 x5 3 84 W d Power consumption of a total of 5 VDC logic section of each module Wsv 0 64 0 05 0 05 0 43 0 55 0 074 x5 8 97 W e A total of 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module Wav 0 W 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q f Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the output module WOUT 0 W g Average power consumption of the input section of the input module WIN 0 004 x 24 x 32 x 1 3 07 W h Power consumption of the power supply section of the intelligent function module Ws 0 W i Power consumption of overall system W 3 84 8 97 0 0 3 07 0 15 88 W 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 3 Module Installation 9 3 1 Precaution on installation N CAUTION Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this manual Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product Hold down the module loading lever at the module bottom and securely insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the PLC in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Tighten the screw in the specified torq
288. urability O lt gt lt gt lt gt lt Category IV Category III Category II Category Figure 8 1 Installation Category Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution Because the PLC is an open device a device designed to be stored within another module be sure to use it after storing in the control box 1 Electrical shock prevention In order to prevent persons who are not familiar with the electric facility such as the operators from electric shocks the control box must have the following functions a The control box must be equipped with a lock so that only the personnel who has studied about the electric facility and have enough knowledge can open it b The control box must have a structure which automatically stops the power supply when the box is opened 2 Dustproof and waterproof features The control box also has the dustproof and waterproof functions Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in our PLC is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or below Pollution level 1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level 2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional tem
289. urned on RESET position Set the RESET L CLR switch in the neutral position Is the CPU module RESET L CLR switch in the neutral position Neutral position NO Can MODE LED YES be turned on Hardware fault Check operations in the order starting from the minimum system f If the module will not work D please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 3 11 3 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 3 F 11 4 lowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the MODE LED of the CPU module flickers at PLC power on at operation start or during operation MODE LED is flickering Did you make forced ON OFF setting Cancel forced ON OFF Is the MODE LED turned on Is the RESET L CLR switch of the CPU module in the neutral position RESET position Move the RESET L CLR switch to the neutral position Neutral position Is the MODE LED turned on Hardware fault Check operations in the order starting from the minimum system If the module will not work please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER
290. urning OFF when it is ON when the power is turned OFF However if only the AC input module is connected to the AC line which is connected to the power suppludetection of the AC down for the power supply module may be delayed by the capacitor in the AC input module Thus connect a load of approx 30mA per QX10 unit to the AC line 2 For DC input power supply e An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 10ms 4 will cause 24VDC down to be detected but operation will continue e An instantaneous power failure lasting more than 10ms 4 may cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending on the power supply load x4 This is for a 24VDC input This is 10ms or less for 24VDC or less 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 5 1 2 Selecting the power supply module The power supply module is selected according to the total of current consumption of the base units I O modules and intelligent function module supplied by its power supply module For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the base unit see Chapter 6 For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the I O modules intelligent function module special function module and peripheral devices see the User s Manuals of their respective modules For devices obtained by a user see the manual for the respective device 1 When the base unit is of Q30B or Q60B Power supply module Q61P A1 Q61P A2 _ Base unit Q35B Q65B
291. us 2 When a program is written while CPU module is running When a program is written while the CPU module is running the switch need not be operated POINTS 1 Even if the RUN STOP switch is set to RUN immediately after a program is written when the CPU module is in the stop status CPU module will not come into RUN status When the CPU module is reset with the RESET L CLR switch and the RUN STOP switch is set to RUN after a program has been written the CPU module can be brought into RUN status 2 If the CPU module is desired to be brought into RUN status without resetting it operate the RUN STOP switch from STOP to RUN RUN to STOP and STOP to RUN in that order After the seconds STOP to RUN switch operation the CPU module is brought into RUN status 3 When a program is written while the CPU module is running in boot operation the program written during the running is written into the program memory After a program has been written while the CPU module is running write the program also into the boot original memory Failure to write a program into the boot original memory will run an old program at the time of the next boot operation For details of the boot operation see Process CPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 4 Latch Clear Operation To perform latch clear operate the RESET L CLR switch in the following procedure
292. using GX Developer 2 Replace the battery 3 Write the backed up data from GX Developer to the memory card Replacing battery Using a flat screw driver slide the battery holder s locking switch away from the LOCK position Remove the old battery from its holder Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct direction Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card Open the front cover while the PLC power supply is on RELEASE position t Push the battery holder all the way into the memory card and confirm that the battery holder s locking switch is set to the LOCK position Monitor SM52 to verify on off Monitor SD52 to verify the bit number that is on A bit other than 0 is on OFF Bit 0 is on The CPU module battery is faulty 10 8 Bit 1 or 2 on Memory card A battery is faulty Completion 10 8 Refer to Section 10 3 2 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This section describes the various types of trouble that occur when the system is operated and causes and remedies of these troubles 11 1 Troubleshooting Basics In order to increase the reliability of the system not only highly reliable devices are used but also the speedy startup of the system after the occurrence of trouble becomes an important factor To start u
293. vals 10 1 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 1 Daily Inspection The items that must be inspected daily are listed below Daily inspection Inspection Item Judgment Criteria Check that fixing screws f 1 Installation of base unit jare not loose and the Ma a and cover must be instaled atana tighten the cover is not dislocated y Check that the module is Installation of I O not dislocated and the The module fixing hook must be engaged oe module module fixing hook is and installed securely on fixing engaged securely Check for loose terminal Screws should not be i ose Retighten terminal screws screws i Proximity of solderless The proper clearance should be provided Connecting conditions terminals to each other between Solderless terminals Correct Connectors of extension Connections should ne baloose Retighten connector cable mounting screws Power supply The LED must be ON Abnormal if the POWER LED Check that the LED is ON LED is OFF CPU Check that the LED is ON The LED must be ON Abnormal if the RUN LED in RUN status LED is OFF CPU Check that the LED is The LED must be OFF Abnormal if the ERR LED OFF LED is ON or flickering CPU Check that the LED is The LED must be OFF Abnormal if the BAT LED OFF LED is ON The LED must be ON when the input power is turned ON Follow Section 11 2 Check that the LED turns The LED must be extinguished when the ON and OFF input power is tu
294. veloper ou cceesccesscseeseseseeeteesseeseeees A 12 H High Performance model QCPU 005 1 1 I I O control method sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeresnn 4 1 Installation and removal 9 9 Intelligent function module Direct AOVICC ceecceeeseeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeenees 4 3 LIM ftir e ities 2 4 Internal current CONSUMPTION eee eee 4 3 L tatth Tange ana AA 4 3 LED BAT iS turned On ssssseeseeeseesrssnsn 11 8 BOOT is flickering n e e 11 9 ERR is turned on flickering 11 7 MODE is not turned On sses 11 3 MODE is flickering s s s 11 4 POWER is turned Off e eeeeeseeeeee 11 5 RUN is turned off flickering 11 6 USER is turned ON essees 11 8 NAMES 2 cacteteeccaetihdttescadeecte iaiia 4 4 LTV Sarees Sep Se Fess eade E E ES 2 4 Link direct device eeeeeeeceeeeteeeeteeeeteteteeees 4 3 M Maximum number of extension stages 2 3 Memory G pacity irnn aa na 4 1 Card stiteiivhend Sites ia tute feinana Sateen 7 1 N Number of device points eeeeeeeeen 4 2 Number of I O points 4 1 Index 1 P POrfOrimanne seeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeees 4 1 Power supply module External dimensions diagram App 8 Example Of wiring s es 9 26 Installation anas 9 14 Names of parts and settings eee 5 6 Specifications iens iar aiiai ai raian 5 1 WIIN acta AAO 9 23 Process
295. w processing S Every END New processing MELSEC Q Corresponding CPU 11 71 11 TROUBLESHOOTING SD542 Constant scan wait time SD543 Cumulative execution time programs Execution time for low speed execution type programs Service interval module Service interval time 11 72 Scan program execution time measurement Meaning Constant scan wait time ms unit Constant scan wait time us unit Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs ms unit Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs us unit Execution time for low speed execution type programs ms unit Execution time for low speed execution type programs us unit Scan program execution time ms unit Scan program execution time us unit Module No Module service interval ms unit Module service interval us unit Special Register List Continued Explanation Waiting time at the time of constant scan setting is stored into SD542 SD543 Measurement is made in 100 s increments SD542 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD543 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Cumulative execution time of low speed program is stored into SD544 SD545 Measurement is made in 100s increments SD544 Place of ms is stored storage range 0 to 65535 SD545 Place of us is stored storage range 0 to 900 Cleared to
296. xclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Na
297. y YES NO Is the ERR LED turned off YES Proper operation Replace the applicable module Error detection Proper operation Replace the CPU module Error detection Replace the applicable Proper operation base unit Error detection Hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description Yy of the problem Completion 11 17 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 Error Code List If a fault occurs when the PLC power supply is switched on or the stopped CPU module runs or during RUN the High Performance model QCPU displays an error on the LED using the self diagnosis function and stores the error information into the special relays SM and special registers SD For the error code 4000H to 4FFFH developed upon a request for general data processing from the GX Developer intelligent function module or network system refer to Appendix 1 11 3 1 Procedure for reading error codes When an error occurs the error code and error message can be read by the GX Developer Version 4 or later The procedure for reading error codes by the GX Developer is as follows 1 Start the GX Developer 2 Connect the CPU module to the personal computer 3 Select Online Read from PLC Menu by the GX Developer and also read the project from the High Performance model QCPU 4 Select the Diagnostics
298. y 5 ms e Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program e This relay repeats ON OFF at every predefined constant time e Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program e This relay repeats ON OFF in accordance with the number of seconds designated by SD414 Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program e This relay repeats ON OFF in accordance with the number of milliseconds designated by SD415 e Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program e This relay repeats ON OFF at designated scan intervals Starts from OFF when the PLC power is turned ON or the CPU module is reset The ON OFF scan intervals are set by the DUTY instruction moy n1 Scan interval of ON n2 Scan interval of OFF nt n2 SM420 H For low speed execution type programs of SM420 to SM424 processing S processing S processing S New Every END pr

User`s Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents